Home

RA78K0 Ver.3.80 Assembler Package Operation UM

1. 55 F2910 Message Can t open temporary file name Cause Temporary file cannot be opened Action by user Use a disk with an open area in its directory F2913 Message Can t read source file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the source file F2914 Message Can t read parameter file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the parameter file F2915 Message Can t read include file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the include file F2916 Message Can t read overlay file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the overlay file F2917 Message Can t write object file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the object file Action by user Output object file to another directory or create an open area in the specified disk F2918 Message Can t write print file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the assemble list file Action by user Output assemble list file to another directory or create an open area in the specified disk F2919 Message Can t write error list file file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the error list file Action by user Output error list file to another directory or create an open area in the specified disk F2920 Message Can t read write temporary fil
2. Error Message F6001 Message Missing input file Cause An input file has not been specified Action by user Specify an input file F6002 Message Too many input files Cause Two or more input files have been specified Action by user Specify only one input file F6004 Message Illegal file name file name Cause Either there are illegal characters in the file name or the number of characters exceeds the limit Action by user Input a file name that has legal characters and is within the character number limit F6005 Message Illegal file specification file name Cause An illegal file has been specified Action by user Specify a legal file F6006 Message File not found file name Cause The specified file does not exist Action by user Specify an existent file F6008 Message File specification conflicted file name Cause An I O file name has been specified in duplicate Action by user Specify different I O file names F6009 Message Unable to make file file name Cause The specified file is write protected Action by user Release the write protection on the specified file F6010 Message Directory not found file name Cause A non existent drive and or directory has been included in the output file name Action by user Specify an existent drive and or directory F6011 Message Illegal path option Cause Other than a path name has been specified in the opti
3. Error Message F2104 Message Can t use this control outside module header Cause A control instruction for specification in a source module header is written in an ordinary source F2105 Message Duplicate PROCESSOR control Cause A PROCESSOR control instruction is written more than once in a source module header F2106 Message Illegal source file name for module name Cause Module name cannot be created because the primary name for the source file name has a character that is not a legal symbol structure character F2107 Message Default segment CSEG is already used Cause Attempted to define an undefined segment with a default segment F2108 Message Symbol table overflow symbol name Cause The number of symbols exceeds the definable limit F2109 Message Too many DS Cause Too many gaps have opened between object codes in a segment because too many DS directives are used so data cannot be output to the object file F2110 Message String table overflow Cause Limits of the string table are exceeded Action by user Reduce number of symbols to 9 characters or less F2111 Message Object code more than 128 bytes Cause Object code exceeds 128 bytes per line in a source statement F2112 Message No processor specified Cause Target device is not specified in the command line or in the source module file F2114 Message Local symbol name of asm statement must begin with L in C source Cause A local symbol
4. User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST Table 10 5 Explanation of Assemble list Output Items Item Details 4 INCLUDE display In Within an INCLUDE file n is the nest level Blank INCLUDE file is not used 5 Source program statement 6 Location counter value 4 or 5 digits 7 Error occurrence line 8 Relocation data R Object code or symbol value is changed by the linker Blank Object code or symbol value is not changed by the linker 9 Segment address 4 or 5 digits 10 Segment size 4 or 5 digits 11 Segment name 12 RA78KO target device 13 Device file version no 14 Number of fatal errors 15 Number of warnings 16 Final error line User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 299 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 23 Symbol list A symbol list outputs the symbols including local symbols defined in a source module Output format Symbol Table List VALUE NAME VALUE ATTR RTYP NAME 2 CSEG 4 CSEG 2 CSEG 4 CODE 1 H 3 EXT 4 CONVAH 2 DSEG 4 DATA 1 FE20H ADDR 4 HDTSA 1 0H 2 ADDR 3 PUB 4 MAIN MOD 4 SAMPM 1 0H 2 ADDR 3 PUB 4 START 1 FE21H ADDR 4 STASC Explanation of output items Table 10 6 Explanation of Symbol list Output Items Item Details 1 Symbol value 4 or 5 digits 2 Symbol attributes CSEG Code segment nam
5. E output file name NE Default assumption NE Function Specify option E to specify the output of an error list file This option also specifies the output destination and output file name Option NE makes option E unavailable Application Specify option E to save error messages in a file Explanation The file name of the error list file can be specified as a disk type file name or as a device type file name However if the device type file name CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur If the device specified in the file name is the same as that specified in the absolute assemble list file an abort error will occur If option E is specified and the output file name is omitted the error list file name will be assemble list file name elv If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will assign the file type elv and output the file If the drive name is omitted when option E is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive df both options E and NE are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Create an error list file sample elv C gt Icnv78k0 kOmain prn esample elv The error list file sample elv is referenced RA78KO warning W6701 Load module file is older than object module file KOMAIN LMF KOMAIN REL Pass1 start RA78KO error F61
6. 115 78 116 NLF LB78K0 252 LK78KO0 179 78 127 NO LK78K0 162 NO OC78K0 223 NO 78 0 105 NP LK78K0 168 NP 78 112 NR 078 0 227 APPENDIX E INDEX NS LK78K0 165 NS OC78K0 225 NU OC78K0 228 O LCNV78K0 286 O LK78K0 162 O OC78K0 223 O 78 105 O ST78K0 79 Object converter 29 201 p 275 P LK78KO 168 P RA78KO 112 Parameter file 67 69 93 97 146 156 201 218 275 280 PATH 316 PICK 263 146 plv 275 PM plus 88 140 194 237 268 291 319 361 poc 201 93 prn 93 275 67 Public symbol list 308 R R LCNV78K0 284 R OC78K0 227 RAM 148 REGULAR 152 153 93 146 241 275 REPLACE 261 ROM 148 S S LK78K0 165 S OC78K0 225 Sample program 373 SC ST78K0 75 Segment location directive 153 SELF RA78KO0 137 SEQUENT 150 Structured assembler preprocessor 26 sym 201 T LB78K0 253 T LK78K0 185 T RA78K0 132 TMP 316 U U OC78K0 228 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 399 APPENDIX E INDEX w W LK78K0 187 Warning 322 WT ST78K0 77 Y L
7. kl Para file Out file KOMAIN LMF Map file KO MAP Direc file Directive kkk Link information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx Local symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME SAMPM MOD SAMPM SAMPM DSEG DATA SAMPM ADDR FE20H HDTSA SAMPM ADDR FE21H STASC Local symbol list SAMPM CSEG CODE SAMPM CSEG CSEG SAMPS MOD SAMPS SAMPS CSEG CSEG SAMPS ADDR 00 4 SASC SAMPS ADDR 00 SASC1 Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Date xx xxx xxxx Page Date xx xxx xxx Page 2 1 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 8 Link list format specification Link list format specification LL LF NLF a LL Syntax LL number of lines Default assumption LL66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function Option LL changes the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in a link list file Application Specify option LL to change the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in a link list file Explanation The range of number of lines that can be specified with option LL is shown below 20 lt number of lines printed on 1 page lt 32767 If a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs If the number of lines is omitted 6
8. Delete button Deletes the selected list item Up button Moves the selected list item up Down button Moves the selected list item down Add Sub Directory button A subdirectory can be added to the selected list item when the item is specified as Include Search Path i I on the lt lt Others gt gt tab Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 145 CHAPTER 6 LINKER The linker inputs a number of object module files output by the 78KO assembler determines a location address and outputs them as a single load module file The linker also outputs list files such as a link list file and an error list file If a link error occurs an error message is output to an error list file to clarify the cause of the error When an error occurs the load module file will not be output 6 1 I O Files of Linker The I O files of the linker are as follows Table 6 1 1 Files of Linker Type File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Object module files These are binary files which contain relocation and rel symbol data for machine language data and the location addresses of machine language data These files are output by the assembler Library files These are files in which two or more object module lib files are included These files are output by the librarian Directive files These are files which contain link commands used dr during linking These files are creat
9. Option D specifies that a specified file is to be input as a directive file Application When you wish to define a new memory area redefine the default memory area or locate a segment to a specific address or memory area you will need to create a directive file Specify option D to input this directive file to the linker Explanation Only disk type file names can be specified as a file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will result If the file name is omitted an abort error will result Nesting of directive files is not permitted The number of characters that can be specified in a directive file is unlimited If option D is specified more than once or if more than one file name is specified an abort error will occur Fora detailed explanation of directive files refer to 6 4 Link Directives Example of use Redefine the default memory area ROM RAM lt Contents of the directive file kO dr gt memory ROM 0000h 1000h memory RAM OFE20h 1E0h Perform link using C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dkO dr Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 167 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 Link list file output specification Link list file output specification P NP Syntax P output file name NP Default assumption P input file name map Function Option P specifies output of a link list file It also specifie
10. security ID can also be specified by defining the following relocation attribute segment in the assembler source However be sure to specify SECUR 10 as the relocation attribute of the segment Any segment name CSEG SECUR ID DB 11H DB 22H DB 33H DB 44H DB 55H DB 66H DB 77H DB 88H DB 99H DB OAAH If specification of the assembler source and specification of this option are made in duplicate this option takes precedence 190 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER Caution If this option is not specified for a device that has a security ID function any code may be allocated Example of use Specify the same 112233445566778899AA as the specification of the above assembler source C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel gi112233445566778899aah Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 191 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 19 Help specification Help specification Syntax Default assumption No display Function Option displays a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the linker options Refer to these when executing the linker Explanation When option is specified all other options are unavailable Caution This option cannot be specified on PM plus To reference PM plus help click the Help button in the lt Linker Options gt dialog box 192 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER Example
11. YE N 5 e Source module editing 72777777 An editor is used to create a source module file Assembly 17777777 An object module file is created NO Debugging 777777 The operation of the software is checked using a hardware debugger such as an in circuit emulator YES System evaluation User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL The RA78KO is then applied to the assembly process Figure 1 5 RA78KO Assembly Process Assembly process e From editing of the source module YES Assembly errors Conversion of object to debugging User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 21 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 11 3 What is a relocatable assembler The machine language translated from a source language by the assembler is stored in the memory of the microcontroller before use To do this the location in memory where each machine language instruction is to be stored must already be determined Therefore information is added to the machine language assembled by the assembler stating where in memory each machine language instruction is to be located Depending on the method of locating addresses to machine language instructions assemblers can be broadly divided into absolute assemblers and relocatable assemblers Absolute assembler An absolute assembler locates machine language instructions assembled from the assembly language to absolute addresses Relocatable assembler I
12. 2 Output detailed warning message 198 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER Flash Start Address for the Product with Flash ROM zb Specify the boot area start address for products with flash memory Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Use Command File Check this option to create a command file Parameterfile f Specify the file to be input as a user defined parameter file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a file name Other options To specify an option other than those that can be set in this dialog box enter the option in the input box Caution The help specification option cannot be specified on PM plus Reset Resets the input contents Option data read Opens lt Read Option Data gt dialog box opens and the option data file is specified that file is read Option data save After the lt Save Option Data gt dialog box opens save the option data file to the option data file with a name Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 199 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 7 3 Edit option dialog box Items are edited in list format in the lt Edit Option gt dialog box The Edit Option dialog box is described below Figure 6 7 lt Edit Option gt Dialog Box Edit Option BEER x LIST T
13. 357 12 8 PM plus Error Messages 361 12 8 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor 5 78 0 361 12 8 2 Assembler 78 0 364 12 8 3 Linker LK78K0 367 12 8 4 Object Converter OC78K0 370 12 8 5 Librarian 1 78 0 371 12 8 6 List Converter 1 78 0 372 APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS 373 1 kOmain asm 374 A 2 kOsub asm 375 testl s 376 A 4 test2 s 377 A 5 testinc s 378 A 6 st bat 379 APPENDIX B NOTES ON USE 380 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS 385 C 1 Structured Assembler Options 385 C 2 Assembler Options 387 C 3 List of Linker Options 390 C 4 List of Object Converter Options 393 C 5 List of Librarian Options 395 C 6 List of List Converter Options 396 APPENDIX D LIST OF SUBCOMMANDS 397 APPENDIX INDEX 398 12 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM LIST OF FIGURES Figure No Title Page RA78KO Assembler Package 17 Flow of Assembler 18 Development Process of Microcontroller Applied Products 19 Software Development Process 20 RA78KO Assembly Process 21 Reassembly for Debugging 23 Program Development Using Existing Module 23 Procedure for Program Development Using RA78KO 24 Creating Source Module File 25 Function of Structured Assembler Preprocessor 26 Function of Assembler 27 Function of Linker 28 Function of Object Converter 29 Function of Librarian
14. Default assumption SCP Function Specifies the final character of the symbol that is the target of judgment in cases when bytes words must be differentiated a symbol name Explanation The structured assembler preprocessor generates different instructions depending on whether the data to be handled is a byte or a word If it is a substitution the MOV instruction is generated for a byte and the MOVW for a word If it is a word symbol reserved word a word instruction is generated If a symbol that is not a reserved word is specified the symbol is judged to be either a byte symbol or a word symbol based on its final character and an instruction is generated If the SC option is not specified a symbol ending with P or p is judged to be a word symbol Characters to be judged are alphabet equivalent characters only Note that alphabet letters are not case sensitive df more than one specification is made the item specified last is valid Example of use Asymbol ending with is specified as a word symbol C gt st78k0 test s sc 16515 3 3 3 SYM 3 lt test asm gt MOV A 3 3 MOVW AX 3 AX 3 MOV SYM 3 SYM 3 MOVW SYM 3 SYM 3 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 75 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 3 Symbol definition specification Symbol definition specification D Syntax D sy
15. Default assumption D Function The DELETE subcommand deletes a module from a library file Explanation specified module does not exist in the library file an error occurs fan error occurs processing is interrupted and the condition of the library file will not be changed Example of use Delete modules M1 from a library file delete kO lib m1 rel m3 rel Before deletion gt kO lib M1 M2 M3 lt After deletion gt k0 lib M2 260 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 4 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN REPLACE REPLACE Syntax REPLACE A library file name A transaction Default assumption R Function The REPLACE subcommand replaces module in a library file with the module in other object module files Explanation If no module in the library file has the same name as the replacement module an error will result If a public symbol contained in the replacement module is the same as a public symbol in the library file an error will occur The file name of the replacement object module must be the same as the file name used in registration If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the condition of the library file will not be changed Example of use Replace a module M2 in a library file kO lib Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 261 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN
16. Example of use Print the title in the header of an assemble list file C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm INRA78KO_MAINROUTINE This references 78kOmain prn 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx RA78KO_MAINROUTINE Date xx xxx xxx Page 1 Title Command c054 kOmain asm IhRA78KO_MAINROUTINE Para file In file KOMAIN ASM Obj file KOMAIN REL Prn file KOMAIN PRN Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT MI SOURCE STATEMENT 1 NAME SAMPM FR III e He e I He e e e e He IK ITI I He e e I e e IK ITI I I e e I III I ITI III IK e HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program Q WD O main routine 124 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER d LT Syntax LT number of characters Default assumption LT8 Function Option LT performs tabulation processing by specifying a number of characters for any type of list for which to substitute and output a number of blank spaces for the HT horizontal tabulation code in a source module Application When specifying a small number of characters per line for any type of list using option LW specify option LT to insert a tab instead of a series of blank spaces thus saving on the number of characters used Explanation The range of number of characters that can be specified with option LT is shown below 0 lt number of characters that can be specified lt 8
17. GLOBAL SUPPORT http www necel com en support support html NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd Hong Kong Tel 2886 9318 NEC Electronics America Inc U S NEC Electronics Europe GmbH Santa Clara California Duesseldorf Germany Tel 408 588 6000 Tel 0211 65030 800 366 9782 NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd Seoul Branch Seoul Korea Tel 02 558 3737 Sucursal en Espana Madrid Spain Tel 091 504 27 87 Succursale Francaise V lizy Villacoublay France Tel 01 30 67 5800 Filiale Italiana Milano Italy Tel 02 66 75 41 e Branch The Netherlands Eindhoven The Netherlands Tel 040 244 58 45 Tyskland Filial Taeby Sweden Tel 08 63 80 820 United Kingdom Branch Milton Keynes UK Tel 01908 691 133 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd Shanghai P R China Tel 021 5888 5400 NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd Taipei Taiwan Tel 02 2719 2377 NEC Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd Novena Square Singapore Tel 6253 8311 J04 1 INTRODUCTION This manual is intended to give users who wish to develop software using the RA78KO an understanding of the functions of each program in the RA78KO Series Assembler Package hereafter referred to as the RA78KO0 and of the correct methods of using the package This manual does not cover the expressions of directives and source programs or language used in the RA78KO Therefore before reading this manual read the RA78KO Series Assembler Pack
18. Option NG makes option G KP and KL unavailable Application sure to use option G when performing symbolic debugging with a source debugger Explanation When option NG is specified the public symbol list and local symbol list cannot be output If both options G and NG are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NO is specified option G is unavailable Example of use Specify addition of debug data to a load module file C gt lk78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g 164 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 4 Generation of stack decision symbols specification Generation of stack decision symbols specification S NS Syntax S area name NS Default assumption NS Function Option S generates the stack decision public symbols OSTBEG and _ STEND Option NS makes option S unavailable Application Specify option S to reserve a stack area Explanation area name is a name in which an area memory name defined by the user an area memory name defined by default is specified area names distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters The linker searches the memory area specified by option S for the largest address in which no segment is located The linker then generates public symbol _ STEND which holds the lead address of the largest address area as
19. The option is as follows means omissible R file Specify object module file L file Specify load module file O file Specify output list file absolute assemble list file Ffile Input option or input file name from specified file E file Create error list file Show this message 290 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 9 5 Option Settings in PM plus This section describes the method for setting list converter options from PM plus 9 51 Option setting method The lt List Converter Options gt dialog box is opened if List converter Options is selected from the Tools menu of PM plus or if the LC button on the toolbar is pressed List converter options can be set by inputting the required options in this dialog box Figure 9 2 lt List Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected List Converter Options E x Output Others Absolute Assemble List Path 5 T Create Error List File e Output Path Command Line Options Cancel Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 291 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER Figure 9 3 lt List Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected List Converter Options Use Command File 1 hd Browser Uther Uptions 292 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVE
20. other than an option is specified a conversational format command ine F5004 Message Illegal file name file name Cause File name includes character s not permitted by the operating system or exceeds the limit for number of characters F5005 Message Illegal file specification file name Cause An illegal item is specified in the file name F5006 Message File not found file name Cause Specified input file does not exist F5007 Message Input file specification overlapped file name Cause Input file name specification is overlapped F5008 Message File specification conflicted file name Cause Input or output file name specifications overlap F5009 Message Unable to make file file name Cause Specified output file cannot be created F5010 Message Directory not found file name Cause A drive or directory which does not exist is included in the output file name F5011 Message Illegal path file name Cause An item other than a path name is specified in an option specifying the path name for a parameter F5012 Message Missing parameter option Cause Required parameter is not specified F5013 Message Parameter not needed option Cause An unnecessary parameter is specified F5014 Message Out of range option Cause Specified value is out of range F5015 Message Parameter is too long option Cause Number of characters specified in parameter exceeds limit User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 353 CHAPTER
21. zbaddress Create Boot file address flash start address go n Change On chip debug program size 256 to 1024 giid Set Security ID Show this message Press RETURN to continue DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o p ne km kd nkp nkl II66 nlf ns g nj w1 directive file usage MEMORY memory area name origin value size memory space name MERGE segment name location type definition merge type definition memory area name memory space name example MEMORY ROM 4000H MEMORY RAMA 0H 100H EX1 MERGE CSEG1 ROM MERGE DSEGt1 AT 80H User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 193 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 7 Option Settings in PM plus This section describes the method for setting linker options from PM plus 6 7 4 Option setting method The lt Linker Options gt dialog box is opened if Linker Options is selected from the Tools menu of PM plus or if the LK button on the toolbar is pressed Linker options can be set by inputting the required options in this dialog box Figure 6 3 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output1 gt gt Tab Is Selected Linker Options xi Output Library Others m Load Module File o Dutput File Name v Browse Output Symbol Information g 1 Create Error List File e Output File On Chip Debud go SIZE 255 bytes Securit
22. If the drive name is omitted when option P is specified the assemble list file will be output to the current drive df both options P and NP are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Create an assemble list file sample prn C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm psample prn 112 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 7 Assemble list file data specification Assemble list file data specification KA NKA KS NKS KX NKX Syntax KA NKA Default assumption KA Function Option KA outputs an assemble list into an assemble list file Option NKA makes option KA unavailable Application Specify option KA to output an assemble list Explanation f both options KA and NKA are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If options NKA NKS and NKX are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If option NP is specified option KA is unavailable Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 113 Example of use Output an assembly list file CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm ka Reference kOmain prn ALNO ON O Q Q N N N P N N N NM H BA 0 OQ N O O Q O Assemble list STNO ADRS OBJECT MI ON O Q Q 3 ou n a Co
23. 1 Name of source module file in which error occurred 2 Line on which error occurred 3 Type of error 4 Error no 5 Error message Caution The file name and the line where the error occurred may not be displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 295 10 2 Lists Output by Assembler 296 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST The assembler outputs the following lists Table 10 3 Lists Output by Assembler Output List File Name Output List Name Assemble list file Assemble list Symbol list Cross reference list Error list file Error list User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 2 1 Assemble list file headers The header is always output at the beginning of an assemble list file Output format 78K 0 Series Assembler 1 Vx xx 2 Date 3 xx xxx xxxx Page 4 1 5 Command 6 kOmain asm c054 Para file 7 In fine 8 KOMAIN ASM Obj file 9 KOMAIN REL Prn file 10 KOMAIN PRN Explanation of output items Table 10 4 Explanation of Assemble List File Headers Output Items Item Details 1 Assembler version no 2 Title character string Character string specified by option LH or TITLE control instruction 3 Date of assemble list creation 4 Page no 5 Subtitle character string Character string specified by SUBTITLE control instruction 6 Command line ima
24. 205 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Intel extended HEX format object module file format Figure 7 3 Intel Extended Format Start address record Extended address record gt Data record Note Extended address record Data record Data record Note The extended address record and data record are repeated here 1 Extended address record 02 0000 02 XXXX ss qo 21 qe 3 i ii iii v vi i Record mark Indicates beginning of record ii Code number fixed to 02 iii OFixed to 0000 iv Record type fixed to 02 v The paragraph value of the segment The paragraph value of the segment is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal vi Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the higher 8 bit value of the address 2 Data record XX XXXX 00 DD DD ss 1 Te T i ii i iv v vi i Record mark Indicates beginning of record 206 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 1 iii iv vi 3 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Code number 2 digits Number of bytes in the code stored in the record A maximum of 16 bytes can be stored Location address offset The start address offset of the code displayed in the record is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal Record type 2 digits Fixed to OOH Code Ma
25. 30 Function of List Converter 31 Function of Debugger 32 Directory Configuration 41 Directory Configuration 42 Structure of Sample Program 46 RA78KO0 Execution Procedure 1 54 RA78KO0 Execution Procedure 2 55 ST78KO0 Execution Procedure 61 Link Directive 63 I O Files of Structured Assembler Preprocessor 67 lt Structured Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected 88 lt Assembler Source Options gt Dialog Box When Assembler Options button Is Selected 88 lt Structured Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected 89 lt Edit Option gt Dialog Box 92 lt Add Option gt Dialog Box 92 I O Files of Assembler 94 lt Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output1 gt gt Tab Is Selected 140 lt Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Is Selected 141 lt Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected 141 lt Edit Option gt Dialog Box 145 lt Add Option gt Dialog Box 145 Memory Area Names 151 Specific Examples of Segment Allocation 155 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected 194 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Is Selected 195 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Li
26. Either NUL or AUX can be specified as the file name The secondary source file is not output when processing is stopped due to a fatal error f more than one specification is made the item specified last is valid Example of use sample asm is specified as the secondary source file C gt st78k0 test s osample asm Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 79 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 7 Error list file specification Error list file specification E Syntax E drive directory file name Default assumption E input file name est Function Specifies the output destination of the error list file and the file name Explanation Specify the output drive directory and file name of the error list file If the E option is omitted the error list file is created in the current directory by replacing the file type of the input file with est Either NUL or AUX can be specified as the file name df more than one specification is made the item specified last is valid Example of use sample est is specified as the error list file C gt st78k0 test s esample est 80 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 8 Parameter file specification Parameter file specification F Syntax F drive directory file name Default assumption With no input file Funct
27. In all other cases the Add Option dialog box opens Specify details of the item to be added in this box Delete button Deletes the selected list item Up button Moves the selected list item up Down button Moves the selected list item down Add Sub Directory button A subdirectory can be added to the selected list item when the item is specified as Include Search Path i I on the lt lt Others gt gt Tab 92 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER5 ASSEMBLER The assembler inputs source module files written in the assembly language for 78KO Series microcontrollers and converts them into machine language coding The assembler also outputs list files such as assemble list files and error list files If assembly errors occur an error message is output to the assemble list file and error list file to clarify the cause of the error 5 1 I O Files of Assembler The I O files of the assembler are as shown below Table 5 1 1 Files of Assembler Type File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Assembler These are source module files written in assembly asm source module language for 78KO Series microcontrollers files These files are created by the user Include files These files are used for reference with assembler source module files These are files written in assembly language for 78KO Series microcontrollers These files are created by th
28. User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 267 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 6 Option Settings in PM plus This section describes the method for specifying library flies from PM plus 8 6 1 Option setting method Select Librarian Options from the Tools menu of PM plus or the LB button on the toolbar is pressed to display the lt Librarian Options gt dialog box After specifying the path and the file name press Next to display the lt Subcommand gt dialog box The various librarian options can be set by inputting the required option in this dialog box Figure 8 3 lt Librarian Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected Librarian Options 7 xj Output Others Library File Name Browse Gutput list r LIST sub command options Output File Name Lt utput public symbol information public Add Form Feed at End of Print File Colums per Line Tw fi 32 Lines per Pagef 56 Command Line Options 268 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Figure 8 4 lt Librarian Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected i Librarian Options Temporary r Browse Uther Uptions c r rss User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 269 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 6 2 Option settings The various options in the lt Librarian gt dialog box are described below lt lt Output gt
29. abbreviated form A ANOXREF A A NOXR abbreviated form For information on control instructions refer to RA78K0 Assembler Package Language User s Manual 116 User s Manual U17199EJ1 VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use Output a cross reference list C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm kx Reference kOmain prn The assemble list is output followed by a cross reference list Cross Reference List NAME VALUE R ATTR CSEG CSEG CODE CSEG CONVAH H E DATA DSEG HDTSA FE20H ADDR MAIN OH ADDR SAMPM MOD START OH R ADDR STASC FE21H ADDR RTYP EXT PUB PUB SEGNAME CSEG CODE DATA DATA CODE CSEG DATA XREFS 218 188 12 14 15 11 2 11 16 29 26 27 19 19 22 31 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 117 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 8 Assemble list file format specification Assemble list file format specification LW LL LH LT LF NLF a LW Syntax LW number of characters Default assumption LW132 80 characters in the case of display output Function Option LW changes the number of characters that can be printed in 1 line in a list file Application Specify option LW to change the number of characters that can be printed in 1 line in any type of list file Explanation The range of number of characters that can be specified with option LW is shown below 80 characters in the case of di
30. 10 3 4 Local symbol list CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST A local symbol list outputs data on local symbols defined in an input module Output format Local symbol list MODULE ATTR 1 SAMPM 2 MOD 1 SAMPM 2 DSEG 1 SAMPM 2 ADDR 1 SAMPM 2 ADDR 1 SAMPM 2 CSEG 1 SAMPM 2 CSEG 1 SAMPS 2 MOD 1 SAMPS 2 CSEG 1 SAMPS 2 ADDR 1 SAMPS 2 ADDR VALUE NAME 4 SAMPM 4 DATA 3 FE20H 4 HDTSA 3 FE21H 4 STASC 4 CODE 4 CSEG 4 SAMPS 4 CSEG 3 OOACH 4 SASC 3 00B2H 4 SASC1 Explanation of output items Table 10 13 Explanation of Local Symbol List Output Items Item Details 1 Name of module in which local symbols are defined 2 Symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol DSEG Data segment name BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit BSEG Bit segment name SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit MAC Macro name SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit MOD Module name RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit SET Symbol defined by SET directive PSW bit NUM NUMBER attribute symbol Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol 3 Symbol value 4 or 5 digits 4 Local symbol name User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 309 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 3 5 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the linker is started up Outp
31. 237 7 5 1 Option setting method 237 7 5 2 Option settings 239 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 241 8 1 I O Files of Librarian 241 8 2 Functions of Librarian 243 10 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 8 3 Librarian Startup 245 8 3 1 Librarian startup 245 8 3 2 Execution start and end messages 248 8 4 Librarian Options 249 8 4 1 Types of librarian options 249 8 4 2 Explanation of librarian options 249 8 5 Subcommands 257 8 5 1 Types of subcommands 257 8 5 2 Explanation of subcommands 257 8 6 Option Settings in PM plus 268 8 6 1 Option setting method 268 8 6 2 Option settings 270 8 7 Method for Manipulating Library Files from PM plus 272 8 7 1 Method for manipulating 272 8 7 2 Item settings 273 9 LIST CONVERTER 275 9 1 I O Files of List Converter 275 9 2 Functions of List Converter 277 9 3 List Converter Startup 280 9 3 1 List converter startup 280 9 3 2 Execution start and end messages 282 9 4 List Converter Options 283 9 4 1 Types of list converter options 283 9 4 2 Explanation of list converter options 283 9 5 Option Settings in PM plus 291 9 5 1 Option setting method 291 9 5 2 Option settings 293 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 294 10 1 Lists Output by Structured Assembler Preprocessor 294 10 1 1 Error list 295 10 2 Lists Output by Assembler 296 10 2 1 Assemble list file headers 297
32. Add Up Delete Down Add Sub Directory Cancel Figure 6 8 lt Add Option gt Dialog Box x Add button Adds a list item If the item to be added is a file or directory the corresponding Browse for Folder dialog box opens In all other cases the Add Option gt dialog box opens Specify details of the item to be added in this box Delete button Deletes the selected list item Up button Moves the selected list item up Down button Moves the selected list item down Add Sub Directory button A subdirectory can be added to the selected list item when the item is specified as Library File Search Path i on the lt lt Library gt gt Tab 200 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER7 OBJECT CONVERTER The object converter inputs the load module file output by the RA78KO linker all reference address data must be determined at this point It then converts this data into hexadecimal format and outputs it as an object module file The object converter also outputs the symbol data used for symbolic debugging as a symbol table file When an object converter error occurs an error message appears on the display to clarify the cause of the error 71 I O Files of Object Converter The I O files of the object converter are as shown below Table 7 1 I O Files of Object Converter Type File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Load module fi
33. DW DS ORG directives are defined in a bit segment E2507 Message Can t describe opcodes outside CSEG Cause Machine language instruction or BR directive is defined in something other than a code segment E2508 Message Can t describe DBIT outside BSEG Cause DBIT directive is defined in something other than a bit segment E2509 Message Illegal address specified Cause An address allocated to an absolute segment is outside the range for that segment E2510 Message Location counter overflow Cause Location counter is outside the range for a corresponding segment E2511 Message Segment name expected Cause Segment name is not specified for segment definition directive for reallocation attribute is AT E2512 Message Segment size is odd numbers segment name Cause Size of reallocation attribute calltO segment is described in an odd number 334 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages ta Error Message E2515 Message Security ID is not supported for this device Cause A security ID cannot be used with the specified device E2517 Message Illegal bank number Cause An illegal bank specification has been described E2601 Message Nesting over of include Cause Nesting of include file exceeds limit 2 levels E2602 Message Must be specified switches Cause Switch name not specified
34. Dutputl Output2 Others Include Search 3 Ed Temporary Directory t M Browse ILI iong Use Self Programming self SJIS zs EUC ze C No Multibyte zn Iv lUse Command Fas Symbol Definition d PO Ed Browse Other Options v Reset Option data read Option data save Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 141 5 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 2 Option settings The various options in the lt Assembler Options gt dialog box are described below lt lt Output gt gt Tab Object Module File o When specified by common option Output Path Name Specify the path of the object module file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name When specified by individual option Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the object module file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Local Symbol Data g Check this option to add debug information local symbol information to the object module file Assembler Source Debugging Data ga Check this option to add source debug information to the object module file Create Error List File e Check this option to output an error list file When specified by common option Output Path Name Specify the path of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly
35. E2603 Message Too many switches described Cause Switch name exceeds limit 5 per module E2604 Message Nesting over of IF classes Cause Nesting of IF _IF clauses exceeds limit 8 levels E2605 Message Needless ELSE statement exists Cause An ELSE statement exists where it is not necessary E2606 Message Needless ENDIF statement exists Cause An ENDIF statement exists where it is not necessary E2608 Message Missing ENDIF Cause An ENDIF statement required by IF _IF clause is missing E2609 Message Illegal ELSEIF statement Cause An ELSEIF or ELSEIF statement is written after an ELSE statement E2610 Message Multiple symbol definition MACRO symbol name Cause Symbol used to define a macro name is already defined E2611 Message Illegal syntax of parameter Cause Formal parameter of a macro is incorrect E2612 Message Too many parameter Cause Number of formal parameters for a macro definition exceeds limit 16 E2613 Message Same name parameter described symbol name Cause Symbol is specified with same name as a formal parameter for a macro definition E2614 Message Can t nest macro definition Cause Macro definition cannot be nested in another macro definition E2615 Message Illegal syntax of local symbol Cause Specification of operand in a LOCAL directive is incorrect E2616 Message Too many local symbols Cause Number of local symbols that can be described in 1 macro body 64 is exceeded User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 335 CHAPTER 12 ERRO
36. Indicates that the same expression is repeated Item s in brackets can be omitted Characters enclosed in quotation marks will be listed as they appear Names of dialog boxes and Windows Characters enclosed in double quotation marks are titles of chapters paragraphs sections diagrams or tables to which the reader is asked to refer Indicates an important point or characters that are to be input in a usage example Indicates one blank space Indicates one or more blank or TAB Indicates zero or more blanks or TABs i e blanks may be omitted Indicates a break between characters Indicates continuity Indicates pressing of the Return key Indicates a footnote for item marked with Note in the text Indicates information requiring particular attention Indicates supplementary information User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Related Documents The documents related to this manual are listed below The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Document related to development tools user s manuals RA78KO Ver 3 80 Assembler Package CC78KO Ver 3 70 C Compiler Language U17200E SM System Simulator 017246 ID78KO NS Ver 2 52 Integrated Debugger Operation U16488E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest version of each document for designing User
37. MEMORY MERGE AT SEQUENT COMPLETE Reserved words cannot be used in a directive file for other meanings Segment name memory area name etc Reserved words can be written in uppercase or lowercase characters but not in a mixture of the two Example MEMORY memory Memory Cannot be used If two or more segments with the same name exist in the source specify COMPLETE in order not to merge the segments and generate an error To merge the segments specify SEQUENT default in the directive SEQUENT Merges the segments in the order in which they appear so that no gaps are created BSEG merges the segments in bit units in the order in which they appear COMPLETE An error occurs if two or more segments with the same name exist Example MERGE DSEG1 COMPLETE RAM Symbols Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished when specifying segment names memory area names and memory space names Numerical values To specify a numerical constant for each item in a directive write the constant in decimal or hexadecimal form The method is the same as for source programs add H at the end for hexadecimals If A F appear at the beginning place O first Example 23H OFC80H Comments When or is written in a directive file all characters entered from that point to carriage return LF are handled as a comment If the directive file ends before a carriage return everything before the end of the file i
38. Up to 60 characters can be specified in the title The character string cannot include blank spaces f more than 61 characters are written the first 60 characters will be recognized and no error message will be output A 2 byte character is calculated as two characters If the maximum number of characters per line is 119 or less the length of the effective character string changes as follows Effective length Max number of characters per line 60 If the length of the character string is not specified an abort error will occur df option NP is specified option LH is unavailable If option LH is omitted the title column of the assemble list file will be blank The character set that can be written in the title column is as follows Table 5 4 Characters That Can Be Written as Titles Character In command line In parameter file 2 gt lt Can be written if enclosed in Can be written Interpreted in the same way as in the command line even if enclosed in Can be written if enclosed in Cannot be written Assumed to be a comment Can be written Cannot be written Assumed to be a comment double quotation mark Cannot be written as an effective Cannot be written as an effective character character 122 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Table 5 4 Characters That Can Be Written as Titles Character In command line In param
39. W2708 Message Already declared LOCAL symbol symbol name Cause This symbol is already declared LOCAL Action by user Declare 1 symbol LOCAL only once per macro W2709 Message Few count of actual parameter Cause Fewer actual parameters are set than formal parameters Program Formal parameters are handled as null strings where actual parameters are processing insufficient W2710 Message Over count of actual parameter Cause More actual parameters are set than formal parameters Program Surplus actual parameters are ignored processing W2711 Message Too many errors to report Cause Too many errors exist to report in a single line i e 6 or more errors Program 6th and subsequent error messages are not output but processing continues processing User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 337 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages Error Message W2712 Message Insufficient cross reference work area Cause Memory is insufficient to process output of cross reference list Program Cross reference list is not output but processing continues processing W2717 Message Normal callt and callf functions must be described together respectively Cause Debugging information may be illegal because normal callt and callf functions are not described together Program Describe normal and callt functions together processi
40. a nonexistent object converter option is specified An error results and the object converter aborts the object conversion When an error message is displayed and object conversion is aborted look for the cause in CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES and take action accordingly 220 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 7 4 Object Converter Options 7 4 1 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Types of object converter options The object converter options are detailed instructions for the operation of the object converter Object converter options are classified into 10 types The classifications of the object converter options and explanations of each type are shown below Table 7 15 Object Converter Options Classification Option Explanation HEX format object module file O Specifies the output of a HEX format object module output specification NO file Symbol table file output S Specifies output of a symbol table file specification NS Specification of sort by object R Sorts HEX format objects in the order of their address order NR addresses Object complement specification U Outputs a specified complement value as an object code for an address area to which no HEX format NU object is output Error list file output specification E Outputs an error list file NE Parameter file specification F Inputs an input file name and options from a specified file HEX format specification KI Intel standard HEX for
41. ek0 elv Use parameter file k0 plv to start up the list converter C gt Icnv78k0 fk0 plv Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 281 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 9 3 2 Execution start and end messages 1 Execution start message When the list converter is started up an execution startup message appears on the display List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Xxxx Pass1 start Pass start 2 Execution end message If it detects no list conversion errors resulting from the list conversion the list converter outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the operating system Conversion complete If the list converter detects a fatal error during list conversion which makes it unable to continue list conversion processing the list converter outputs a message to the display cancels list conversion and returns control to the operating system Example A non existent list converter option is specified C gt Icnv78k0 kOmain prn a List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx RA78KO error F6018 Option is not recognized a Program aborted When the list converter outputs an error message and aborts list conversion look for the cause in CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES and take action accordingly 282 Users Manual U
42. pst specifying the structured assembler preprocessor options from the file These files are created by the user Output files Secondary source These are source module files written in assembly asm module files language Error list file These are files containing structured assembler est preprocessor error data Figure 4 1 I O Files of Structured Assembler Preprocessor Source module file Parameter file Secondary Error list file source module file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 67 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 2 Functions of Structured Assembler Preprocessor 1 The structured assembler preprocessor reads source module files converts them into assembler input source files and outputs them as assembler source files 2 If an error related to the file or system occurs the structured assembler preprocessor outputs an abort error and if a write error is found in the source module it outputs a fatal error or warning error If an abort error or fatal error occurs the secondary source file cannot be output normally However when the J option has been specified the secondary source file can be output even if a fatal error has occurred 3 Structured assembly preprocessor processing is performed in accordance with the option specified at startup For a detailed explanation of the structured assembler preprocessor options refer to 4 4 Structured Assembler Options
43. the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Output a load module file kO Imf C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel okO Imf 162 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 2 Forced load module file output specification Forced load module file output specification J NJ Syntax J NJ Default assumption NJ Function Option J specifies that the load module will be output even if a fatal error occurs Option NJ makes option J unavailable Application Normally when a fatal error occurs the load module file cannot be output When you wish to execute the program with a notice that a fatal error has occurred specify option J to output the load module file Explanation When option J is specified the load module will be output even if a fatal error occurs If both options J and NJ are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NO is specified option J is unavailable Example of use Specify output of a load module file even if a fatal error occurs C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel j User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 163 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 3 Debug data output specification Debug data output specification G NG Syntax G NG Default assumption G Function Option G specifies that debugging data local symbol data is to be added to a load module file
44. 1 N Se YS The absolute assemble list output by the list converter agrees completely with the addresses used in actual program operation The actual values of external symbols are embedded in the list Relocatable values are embedded in the list as actual values For the symbol values in symbol tables or cross reference lists the actual values are embedded in the list Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 277 Example 1 lt Assemble list gt CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER Relocation embedding 21 2 CSEG 22 22 0000 START 23 23 24 24 chip initialize 25 25 26 26 0000 11201A MOV HDTSA 1AH 27 27 0003 1620FE MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor 28 28 29 29 0006 R9A0000 CALL convert ASCII lt HEX 30 30 output BC register lt ASCII code 31 31 0009 1421FE MOVW STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 32 32 0000 63 MOV A B 33 33 000D 95 MOV DE A 34 34 000E 84 INCW DE 35 35 000F 62 MOV A C 36 36 0010 95 MOV DE A 37 37 38 38 0011 FAFE BR 39 39 40 40 END lt Absolute assemble list gt 21 21 CSEG 22 22 0080 START 23 23 24 24 chip initialize 25 25 26 26 0080 11201A MOV HDTSA 1 27 27 0083 1620FE MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor 28 28 29 29 0086 R9A9300 CALL CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX 30 30 output BC register lt ASCII code 31 31 0089 14
45. 10 2 2 Assemble list 298 10 2 3 Symbol list 300 10 2 4 Cross reference list 301 10 2 5 Error list 303 10 3 Lists Output by Linker 304 10 3 1 Link list file headers 304 10 3 2 Map list 306 10 3 3 Public symbol list 308 10 3 4 Local symbol list 309 10 3 5 Error list 310 10 4 List Output by Object Converter 311 10 4 1 Error list 311 10 5 List Output by Librarian 312 10 5 1 Library data output list 312 10 6 Lists Output by List Converter 313 10 6 1 Absolute assemble list 313 10 6 2 Error list 313 CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF 78 314 11 1 Improving Operating Efficiency EXIT Status Function 314 11 2 Preparing Development Environment Environmental Variables 316 11 3 Interrupting Program Execution 317 11 4 Making Assemble List Easy to Read 318 11 5 Reducing Program Startup Time 319 11 5 1 Specifying control instruction in the source program 319 11 5 2 Using PM plus 319 11 5 3 Creating parameter files and subcommand files 320 11 6 Object Module Library Formation 321 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 322 12 1 Overview of Error Messages 322 12 2 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages 323 12 3 Assembler Error Messages 329 12 4 Linker Error Messages 340 12 5 Object Converter Error Messages 349 12 6 Librarian Error Messages 353 12 7 List Converter Error Messages
46. 4 If the structured assembly preprocessor processing has been completed correctly the structured assembler preprocessor outputs a completed message and returns control to the OS 68 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 3 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Startup 4 3 1 Structured assembler preprocessor startup Two methods can be used to start up the structured assembler preprocessor 1 Command line startup Start up the structured assembler preprocessor by inputting the following command path name st78k0 A option source module file name A option 1 ii a b c d e d a Current drive name Current directory name C Structured assembler preprocessor command file name Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the structured assembler preprocessor When specifying more than one option delimit the options with a space For a detailed explanation of the structured assembler options refer to 4 4 Structured Assembler Options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks e File name of source module to undergo structured assembly Specify the file name of a path that includes a space by enclosing it in a pair of double quotation marks Example C gt st78k0 c054 test1 s e 2 Startup from a parameter file Use a parameter file to avoid the inconvenience involved when repeating the same
47. 6 2 Environmental variables 44 2 6 3 Kanji code in source file 45 CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 46 3 1 Before Executing RA78KO 46 3 1 1 Sample programs 46 3 1 2 Configuration of sample program 49 3 2 Execution Procedure of RA78K0 50 3 3 Execution Procedure of 5 78 56 3 4 Assembling Linking and Object Conversion from Command Line DOS Prompt UNIX 3 5 Using Parameter File 66 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 67 4 1 I O Files of Structured Assembler Preprocessor 67 4 2 Functions of Structured Assembler Preprocessor 68 4 3 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Startup 69 4 3 1 Structured assembler preprocessor startup 69 4 3 2 Execution start and end messages 71 4 4 Structured Assembler Options 73 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 62 4 4 1 Types of structured assembler options 73 4 4 2 Explanation of structured assembler options 73 4 5 Option Settings from PM plus 88 4 5 1 Setting options 88 4 5 2 Options 90 4 5 3 Edit option dialog box 92 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 93 5 1 I O Files of Assembler 93 5 2 Functions of Assembler 95 5 3 Assembler Startup 96 5 3 1 Command line startup 96 5 3 2 Startup from a parameter file 97 5 3 3 Execution start and end messages 98 5 4 Assembler Options 100 5 4 1 Types of assembler options 100 5 4 2 Order of precedence of assembler options 102 5 4 8
48. DELETE D Deletes a module from a library file REPLACE R Replaces module in a library file with other modules PICK P Retrieves a module from a library file LIST L Outputs data on modules in a library file HELP H Displays a help message on the display EXIT E Exits librarian 8 5 2 Explanation of subcommands The following is a detailed explanation of the function and operation of each subcommand General format of command files Subcommand A option A library file name A option transaction A option 0 library file name specified immediately before be replaced with b Transaction A object module file name A library file name A A module name A Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 257 1 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN CREATE CREATE Syntax CREATE A library file name A transaction Default assumption Function The CREATE subcommand creates a new library file Explanation The size of the created library file becomes 0 When a transaction is specified a module is registered at the same time as the library file is created Library file name If a file with the same name already exists it will be overwritten Transaction An object module file carrying the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file cannot be registered A module with the same name as a module in the library file cannot be r
49. ID specification GI Specifies a security ID Help specification Displays a help message on the display User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 6 2 Order of precedence of linker options The following table indicates which linker option takes precedence when two linker options are specified at the same time Table 6 6 Order of Precedence of Linker Options NO NG NP NKM NKP NKL J NG NG G NG NG P A A A NG KM NG NG KD NG NG NG KP NG NG NG KL NG NG NG LL NG NG LF NG NG Items marked with an NG When the option in the horizontal axis is specified the option shown in the vertical axis option is unavailable Example C gt Ik78k0 k0main rel k0sub rel np km The option KM is unavailable Items marked with a A When all three of the options in the horizontal axis are specified the option shown in the vertical axis option is unavailable Example C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel p nkm nkp nkl The options NKM NKP and NKL are all specified at the same time so option P is unavailable When an option and its N counterpart are specified at the same time for example both O and NO only the last specified of the 2 options is available Example C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel o no The option NO is specified after O so option O is unavailable and NO is available Options not specified in Table
50. LW is shown below In the case of display output this number is 80 72 lt number of characters printed 1 line lt 260 f a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs Ifthe number of characters is omitted 132 will be specified If the list file is output to the display 80 is specified The specified number of characters does not include the terminator CR LF If the LIST subcommand is not specified option LW is ignored If option LW is specified 2 or more times the last specified item will take precedence Example of use Specify 80 as the number of characters per line in a list file C gt lb78k0 Iw80 250 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN b LL Syntax LL number of lines Default assumption LL66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function Option LL specifies the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in a list file Application Specify option LL to change the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in a list file Explanation The range of number of lines that can be specified with option LL is shown below 20 lt number of lines printed on 1 page lt 32767 f a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs If the number of lines is omitted 6
51. Message Linker internal error Cause Internal error Action by user Contact NEC Electronics an NEC Electronics distributor E3114 Message Illegal number Cause Specification of a numerical value in a directive is incorrect E3115 Message Too large value up to 1048575 0FFFFFH Cause A value greater than 1048575 OFFFFFH is described in the directive E3116 Message Memory area Memory area name definition out of range Cause The sum of the start address and size of the memory area specified in the memory directive exceeds 1048575 OFFFFFH E3117 Message Can t find target chip in all modules Cause The target device cannot be identified because the series common object specification COMMON option is specified for all the input object module files Action by user Remove the unnecessary series common object specification COMMON options E3201 Message Multiple segment definition segment name in merge directive Cause Segment specified in the merge directive is already registered the same segment is attempted to specify allocation using multiple merge directives E3202 Message Segment type mismatch segment 1 in file segment 2 ignored Cause A segment with the same name as this segment but having the reallocation attributes of a different segment type is found F3203 Message Segment segment name unknown segment type Cause An error exists in the segment data of the input object module file specification of link of output segments is i
52. Message Parameter file nested Cause The F option has been specified inside a parameter file Action by user Do not specify the F option inside a parameter file F1020 Message Parameter file read error file name Cause The parameter file cannot be read Action by user Specify a correct parameter file F1021 Message Memory allocation failed Cause There is insufficient memory Action by user Secure the necessary memory F1100 Message Can t set Control C Cause Control C to stop execution of the structured assembler preprocessor cannot be set Action by user Execute the structured assembler preprocessor once again F1101 Message Open read write close error on file name Cause Due to a file I O error the file cannot be opened read written to or closed normally Action by user Specify a correct file name 324 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages ta Error Message F1102 Message Can t find file name F1103 Message Illegal include file file name Cause An illegal name has been specified for an include file Action by user Specify a correct file F1104 Message Illegal sc character Cause A character that cannot be used as a symbol has been specified in the SC option Action by user Specify a correct character F1105 Message Can t define the reserved sym
53. Number of library files specifiable by B option 10 Number of include file paths specifiable by I option 64 35 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 4 Features of RA78K0 The 78 has the following features 1 Macro function When the same group of instructions must be described in a source program over and over again a macro can be defined by giving a single macro name to the group of instructions By using this macro function coding efficiency and readability of the program can be increased 2 Optimize function of branch instructions The RA78KO has a directive to automatically select a branch instruction BR directive To create a program with high memory efficiency a byte branch instruction must be described according to the branch destination range of the branch instruction However it is troublesome for the programmer to describe a branch instruction by paying attention to the branch destination range for each branching By describing the BR directive the assembler generates the appropriate branch instruction according to the branch destination range This is called the optimization function of branch instructions 3 Conditional assembly function 36 With this function a part of a source program can be specified for assembly or non assembly according to a predetermined condition If a debug statement is described in a source program whether or not the debug statement should be translated into machine language can be se
54. Q O FE20 FE21 n 0000 Po O d 0000 m N O 0000 0003 N R0000 11201A 1620FE SOURCE STATEMENT NAME SAMPM kk k k III k k k k k k k K k I He e I KK e He KK I IK IKI k KOK OK IK IAA kk IK e ie HEX ASCII Conversion Program main routine FR IIR III k Kk k k I k k K k e He He e He He e ITI I I e e IK KAI IK PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH DATA DSEG AT OFE20H HDTSA DS 1 STASC DS 2 CODE CSEG MAIN DW START CSEG START MOV HDTSA 1AH MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL 114 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER b KS NKS Syntax KS NKS Default assumption NKS Function Option KS outputs an assemble list followed by a symbol list into an assemble list file Option NKS makes option KS unavailable Application Specify option KS to output a symbol list Explanation f both options KS and NKS are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If options KS and KX are specified at the same time KS is ignored If options NKA NKS and NKX are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If option NP is specified option KS is unavailable Example of use Output a symbol list
55. Register the file to the registry 32 bit environment by clicking the Move button 40 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION 2 4 Directory Configuration 2 4 4 Windows version directory configuration The standard directory displayed during installation is NECTools32 on the drive where Windows is installed The configuration of the install directory is as shown below The drive and install directory may be changed during installation Install PM plus and the RA78KO in the same directory Figure 2 1 Directory Configuration NECTools32 bin st78k0 exe ra78k0 exe IK78k0 exe oc78k0 exe Ib78k0 exe Icnv78k0 exe Ib78k0e exe Ib78k0p exe ra78k0 is 78kOp dll 78k0 hlp I doo I hlp I setup smp78k0 ra78k0 kOmain asm kOsub asm ra bat readme doc test1 s test2 s testinc s st bat Execution format of structured assembler preprocessor Execution format of assembler Execution format of linker Execution format of object converter Execution format of librarian Execution format of list converter Interface tool between library and DLL of PM plus environment Standalone start up library File used by assembler DLL tool for PM plus Help file for starting command line text file User s manual and supplementary explanations Online manual Data files for installation and uninstallation Assembler sample program Assembler sample program Batch file for
56. Syntax Default assumption No display Function Option displays a help message Application The help message is a list of explanations of the assemble options Refer to these when executing the assembler Explanation When option is specified all other options are unavailable To read the next part of the help message press the return key To quit the help display press any key other than the return key and then press the return key Caution This option cannot be specified on PM plus To reference PM plus help click the Help button in the lt Assembler Options gt dialog box 138 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use When option is specified a help message is output on the display C gt ra78k0 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx XXX Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx usage ra78k0 option input file option The option is as follows means omissible CX Select target chip 012 014 etc Must be specified o file no Create the object module file with the specified name Not e file ne Create the error list file with the specified name Not p file np X Create the print file with the specified name Not ka nka Output the assemble list to print file Not ks nks Output the symbol table list to print file
57. XX xxx xx 9 CONVAH NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 10 1 Explanation of output items Table 10 17 Explanation of Library Data Output List Output Items Item Details 1 Librarian version no 2 Date of list creation 3 Number of pages 4 Library file name 5 Date of library file creation 6 Module serial no beginning from 0001 7 Module name 8 Date of module creation 9 Public symbol name 10 Number of public symbols defined in module 312 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 6 Lists Output by List Converter The list converter outputs the following lists Table 10 18 Lists Output by List Converter Output List File Name Output List Name Absolute assemble list file Absolute assemble list Error list file Error list 10 6 1 Absolute assemble list The absolute assemble list embeds absolute values in the assemble list and outputs the list Output format Same as for the assemble list output by the assembler 10 6 2 Error list Error messages output when the list converter is started up are stored in an error list Output format Same as for the error list output by the assembler User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 313 CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF RA78KO This chapter introduces some methods that will help you to use the RA78KO efficiently 11 1 Improving Operating Efficiency EXIT Statu
58. a sample program 0200000080007E 1000800011201A1620FE9A93001421FE63958462B3 1000900095 617131809 40073617131809 82 0D00A000A40072AF4D8D020D070D30AFA8 00000001FF 204 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Intel standard HEX format object module file format Figure 7 2 Intel Standard Format Data record Data record End record Note The data record is repeated here 1 Data record Note XX XXXX 00 E i ii iii gt gt i Record mark Indicates beginning of record ii Code number 2 digits Number of bytes in the code stored in the record A maximum of 16 bytes can be stored iii Location address offset The start address offset of the code displayed in the record is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal iv Record type 2 digits Fixed at 00 v Code Max 32 digits The object code is shown one byte at a time with the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits separated A maximum of 16 bytes can be expressed in the code vi Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the code 2 End record 00 0000 01 t Q wm i ii i i Record mark ii Code number fixed at 00 iii Fixed at 0000 iv Record type fixed at 01 v Check sum fixed at FF User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM
59. address of the data in iv within the range OH to FFFFFFFH Data This is the loaded data itself Check sum 4 S7 record S7 WWWWWWWW ZZ t ii iii iv i Record type 1 iii iv Record length This is the number of bytes in iii plus the number of bytes in iv Entry address This is the 32 bit entry address within the range 10 FFFFFFFH Check sum User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 5 S8 record S7 XX WWWWWWWW ZZ T T i ii iil iv i Record type iii iv Record length This is the number of bytes in iii plus the number of bytes in iv Entry address This is the 24 bit entry address within the range OH to FFFFFFH Check sum User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 2 4 Symbol table file The symbol table file output by the object converter is input to a debugger The following is the symbol table file of the sample program 04 FF PUBLIC 010097CONVAH 010000MAIN 010080START O0FE20 QSTBEG 00FB00_ STEND FF SAMPM 02FE20HDTSA 02FE21STASC FF SAMPS lt 0100A8SASC 0100AESASC1 Symbol Table File Formats Start of symbol table B Start of public 4 blank Note 1 Symbol Symbol Public symbol attributes value name Symbol Symbol Local symbol attributes value name Start of local symbol Symbol Symbol Local symbol attrib
60. and underscore Numerals are not permitted for the start character Value Up to 64 bits 16 hexadecimal digits possible Type Address or scalar a scalar indicates any numerical value other than an address Addresses are divided into code addresses instruction addresses and data addresses addresses of data items Global local Indicates whether a symbol is global external reference enabled or specification local Section A section may be considered a range to which a memory name is membership given Each address in a program belongs to at least 1 section A scalar does not belong to any section The format for the symbol block is shown in Table 7 8 Table 7 8 Symbol Block Format for Extended Tech No of ASCII Field Characters Explanation Header 6 Standard header field Block type 3 Section name 2 17 Section name 2 to 17 Name of the section which includes the symbols defined in the block Number of characters is variable Section definition 5 35 Each symbol block must have 1 of this type of field This field may be placed before or after any number of symbol definition fields This format is shown in Table 7 9 Symbol definition 5 to 35 each This is a symbol definition field greater than 0 as shown in Table 7 10 The symbols contained in a program are transferred as a symbol block Each symbol block includes a section name and a list of the symbols that belong to that section If
61. and assembler options from a specified file Specification of path for T Creates a temporary file in a specified path temporary file creation Kanji code specification ZS Kanji described in the comment is interpreted as shift JIS code ZE Kanji described in the comment is interpreted as EUC code ZN Characters described in the comment are not interpreted as kanji Device file search path Y Reads a device file from a specified path specification Symbol definition specification D Defines a symbol Series common object COMMON Specifies output of an object module file common specification to the 78KO Series Self programming specification SELF Specify when using self programming Help specification Displays a help message on the display User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 101 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 4 2 Order of precedence of assembler options The following table indicates which assembler option takes precedence when two assembler options are specified at the same time Table 5 3 Order of Precedence of Assembler Options NO NP NKA NKS KX NKX J NG NG G NG NG P A A A NG KA NG NG KS NG NG NG KX NG NG LW NG NG LL NG NG LH NG NG LT NG NG LF NG NG Items marked with an NG When the option in the horizontal axis is specified the option shown in the vertical axis option is unavailable Example C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain
62. assembler sample program Explanation of sample program and batch file text file Structured assembler sample program Structured assembler sample program Structured assembler sample program Batch file for structured assembler sample program Remark The explanations in this manual assume installation to the standard directory with the default program folder name NECTools32 according to the default directions of the setup program Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 41 CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION 2 4 2 UNIX version directory configuration The file configuration after installation is as follows The following assumes installation in nectools bin nectools 28 bin st78k0 ra78k0 IK78k0 oc78k0 Ib78k0 Icnv78k0 hlp ra78k0 is asm s sh sh readme doc Figure 2 2 Directory Configuration Executable format of structured assembler preprocessor Executable format of assembler Executable format of linker Executable format of object converter Executable format of librarian Executable format of list converter Help file corresponding to each program text file Table file defining instruction set used by assembler Sample program for installation confirmation Batch file for installation confirmation Batch file for installation confirmation Explanation of use of install confirmation shell file text file It is recommended to install the C compiler integrated debugger system simulator and device fil
63. box Message Invalid description format with object complement Cause The object filling value is specified in an illegal format Action by user Specify a format that can be described Button OK Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of complement value is from 0h to 0ffh Cause A value outside the input limit range is specified as the filling value Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button OK Close the message box Message Out of range The range of start address is from 0h to the maximum address of program area except sfr area Cause A value outside the input limit range is specified as the start address Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button OK Close the message box Message Out of range The range of size is from 1h to the maximum address of program area except sfr area start address 1h Cause A value outside the limit input range is specified as the size Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button OK Close the message box Message Cannot find folder Will you create Cause The specified folder does not exist Action by user Create a folder or select another folder Button OK Creates a folder and close the message box Cancel Close the message box Message Not make folder Cause The specified folder could not be c
64. comment zn no multibyte code in comment ydirectory Set device file search path Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o e scp wi2 4 gs User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 87 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 5 Option Settings from PM plus This section will explain how to set up the structured assembler from PM plus 4 51 Setting options The lt Structured Assembler Options gt dialog box is opened if Structured Assembler Options is selected from the Tools menu of PM plus or if the ST button on the toolbar is pressed By entering the required options in this dialog box the structured assembler options can be set Figure 4 2 lt Structured Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected Structured Assembler Options Output Others ASM Source File o Output Path Name Browse Number of Tabst wt Output Debug Information gs 2 zi Change Source Regulation Z Until Operands 3 amp SJIS zs C EUC ze Until Comments 4 E No Multibyte zn r Create Error List File e Dutput Path Name Browse Assembler Options Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help Figure 4 3 lt Assembler Source Options gt Dialog Box When Assembler Options button Is Selected Assembler Sorce Options 3 Iv Use Assembler o
65. expression expected Cause Odd number address is specified for word access E2318 Message Operand out of range sfr Cause Operands for the SFR SFRP directives are specified exceeding the limit or an odd value is specified for the operand of the SFRP directive E2326 Message Illegal SFR access in operand Cause An SFR symbol that cannot access an operand is described E2327 Message Illegal bank access in operand Cause A symbol that cannot access an operand is described E2401 Message Illegal symbol for PUBLIC symbol name Cause This symbol cannot be declared PUBLIC E2402 Message Illegal symbol for EXTRN EXBIT symbol name Cause This symbol cannot be declared EXTRN EXTBIT E2403 Message Can t define PUBLIC symbol symbol name Cause This symbol already has a PUBLIC declaration and cannot be defined with a PUBLIC declaration Action by user A symbol defined with bit items other than saddr bit cannot have a PUBLIC declaration Cancel PUBLIC declaration or change EQU definition E2404 Message Public symbol is undefined symbol name Cause A symbol with a PUBLIC declaration is undefined E2405 Message Illegal bit symbol Cause An illegal symbol is used as a forward reference symbol or bit symbol for the bit symbol of an operand in a machine language instruction Action by user Specify backward reference or EXTBIT declaration for the bit symbol E2406 Message Can t refer to forward bit symbol symbol name Cause Specification refers forward to a bit s
66. file are specified at the same specification time the option specified NE Makes option E last takes precedence unavailable Parameter F file name Inputs options and Independent Options and file input file name from a input file names specification specified file can only be input from the command line Help s Displays a help All other options are No display specification message on the unavailable display console User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM APPENDIX LIST OF SUBCOMMANDS This appendix is a summary of the subcommands in list form It will be helpful to refer to this list when developing software programs This list of subcommands can also serve as an index Table D 1 List of Subcommands Classification Format Function Abbrev Format CREATE CREATE A library file name A Creates a new library file C transaction ADD ADD A library file name A Adds a module to a library file A transaction DELETE DELETE A library file name A A Deletes a module from a D module name A library file REPLACE REPLACE A library file name A Replaces one module with R transaction another in a library file PICK PICK A library file name A Retrieves a specified module module name A A from an existing library file LIST LIST Aoption library file name A Outputs data on modules in a L module name A A library file HELP HELP Displays a he
67. file specification F Syntax F file name Default assumption With no input file Function Option F inputs assembler options and the input file name from a specified file Application Specify option F when the data required to start up the assembler will not fit on the command line Specify option F to repeatedly specify the same options each time assembly is performed and to save those options to a parameter file Explanation 130 Only a disk type file name can be specified as file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will occur If the file name is omitted an abort error will occur Nesting of parameter files is not permitted If option F is specified within a parameter file an abort error will occur The number of characters that can be written within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Parameters and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last will take precedence The characters following or in a parameter file are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF If option F is specified two or more times an abort error will occur User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use Perform assembly usi
68. first addresses of the flash ROM area of the input files are not the same 346 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages tas a Error Message E3431 Message There are different function name in same ID function name file file name Cause Two or more functions declared as EXT FUNC by the compiler have the same ID value E3432 Message Illegal allocation of an EXT FUNC function function name file file name Cause The entity of the function declared as EXT FUNC by the compiler exists when linking is performed with the ZB option specified F3901 Message Can t open overlay file name Cause Overlay file cannot be opened Action by user Make sure the overlay file is in the correct directory a directory containing an execution program F3902 Message File file name not found Cause The specified library file cannot be opened F3903 Message Can t read input file file name Cause Object module file specified as an input file cannot be read F3904 Message Can t open output file file name Cause Output file cannot be opened Action by user Check condition open capacity condition of media etc of the disk used to create output file F3905 Message Can t create temporary file file name Cause Temporary file for symbol entry cannot be created Action by user Check condition open ca
69. gt Tab Library File Name Specify the name of the library file by using the Browse button or by directly inputting the file name LIST sub command options Check this box to output a list file Output File Name Specify the name and path of the list file by using the Browse button or by directly inputting the file name Output public symbol information publc Check this box to add public symbol information to the list file to be output Add Form Feed at End of Print File If Check this box to add a page feed code FF to the end of a library file Colums per Line Iw Specify the number of characters on one line of a library file Between 72 and 260 characters can be specified Lines per Page ll Specify the number of lines on one page of a library file Between 20 and 32767 lines can be specified Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Others gt gt Tab Temporary directory t Specify the path where a temporary file is to be created by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name Other Options To specify an option other than those that can be set in the dialog box enter it in the input box Caution The help specification option cannot be specified on PM plus Reset Resets the input contents Option data read Opens the lt Read Option Data gt dialog box and after the option f
70. if a fatal error has occurred the object module file can be output in case of specifying option J 3 The assembler performs assembly according to the assembler option specified at assembler startup For a detailed explanation of the assembler options refer to 5 4 Assembler Options 4 If assembly is completed correctly the assembler outputs an Assembly Finished message and returns control to the operating system User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 95 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 3 Assembler Startup 5 96 Two methods can be used to start up the assembler 3 1 Command line startup X gt path name ra78k0 A option source module file name option A T T T T T a b d d a Current drive name b Current directory name c Command file name of the assembler d Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the assembler When specifying two or more assembler options separate the assembler options with a blank space For a detailed explanation of assembler options refer to 5 4 Assembler Options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks e File name of source module to be assembled Specify the file name of a path that includes a space by enclosing it in a pair of double quotation marks Example C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm e np User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 3 2 Startup from a parameter file Use the paramete
71. inputting a path name When specified by individual option Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Command Object Module File common Check this option to output an object module file common to the 78K0 Series Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Create Print File p Check this option to output an assemble list file When specified by common option Output Path Name Specify the path of the assemble list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name When specified by individual option Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the assemble list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Output Assemble List ka Check this option to output an assemble list in the assemble list file Output Symbol List ks Check this option to output a symbol list file following the assemble list in the assemble list file 142 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Output Cross Reference List kx Check this option to output a cross reference list following the assemble list in the assemble list file Add Form Feed at End of Print File If Check this option to suffix a form feed code FF to the assemble list file Columns per L
72. names output to load module file Segment names read from object module file Input module name Segment start address 4 or 5 digits Output input segment size 4 or 5 digits Segment type and reallocation attributes Target device for this assemble Device file version no User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 307 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 3 3 Public symbol list A public symbol list outputs data on public symbols defined in an input module Output format Public symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME 1 SAMPM 2 ADDR 3 OOOOH 4 MAIN 1 SAMPM 2 ADDR 3 0080H 4 START 1 SAMPS 2 ADDR 3 0095H 4 CONVAH Explanation of output items Table 10 12 Explanation of Public Symbol List Output Items Item Details 1 Name of module in which public symbols are defined 2 Symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol DSEG Data segment name BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit BSEG Bit segment name SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit MAC Macro name SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit MOD Module name RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit SET Symbol defined by SET directive PSW bit NUM NUMBER attribute symbol Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT TE Undefined symbol 3 Symbol value 4 or 5 digits 4 Public symbol name 308 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM
73. not permitted If option F is specified within a parameter file an abort error will occur The number of characters that can be written within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or file names with a blank space a tab or a line feed code LF Options and input file names written in a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last will take precedence The characters following or in a parameter file are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF If option F is specified two or more times an abort error will occur User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 183 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Example of use Perform link using a parameter file lt contents of the parameter file KO plk gt parameter file kOmain rel kOsub rel pkO map e tc tmp g Enter the following on the command line C gt Ik78k0 fk0 plk 184 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 13 Specification of path for temporary file creation Specification of path for temporary file creation T Syntax T path name Default assumption Creates a temporary file in the path specified by the environmental variable TMP When no path is specified the temporary file is created in a current path Function Option T specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Ap
74. of lines lines that can be option LL is unavailable specification printed in 1 page in a link list file LF Inserts a form feed If both options LF and NLF FF code at the end NLF are specified at the of a link list file same time the option specified last takes NLF Makes the LF option precedence unavailable If option NP is specified the option specified last takes precedence Error list file E file name Outputs error list file If both options E and NE NE output are specified at the same specification time the option specified E NE Default value NE last takes Makes option E unavailable Library file B file name Inputs a specific file Independent specification as a library file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 391 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS Table C 3 List of Linker Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Library file Ipath name Reads library file If a library file without a path Path specified read path from a specified path name is specified by option by specification two or B option I is unavailable environmental more path variable names can LIB78KO be specified Parameter F file name Inputs linker options Independent Options and file and the input file input file names specification name froma can only be specified file input f
75. of use When option is specified a help message is output on the display C gt Ik78k0 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx usage lk78k0 option input file option The option is as follows means omissible ffile Input option or input file name from specified file dfile Read directive file from specified file bfile Read library file from specified file idirectory directory Set library file search path o file no Create load module file with specified name Not p file np Create link map file with specified name Not e file ne Create error list file with specified name Not tdirectory Set temporary directory km nkm Output map list to link map file Not kd nkd Output directive file image to link map file Not kp nkp Output public symbol list to link map file Not kl nkl Output local symbol list to link map file Not Il length Specify link map file lines per page If nlf Add Form Feed at end of the link map file Not s memory area ns Create stack symbol in specified memory area Not g ng Output symbol information to load module file Not ydirectory Set device file search path j nj Create load module file if fatal error occurred Not w n Change warning level 0 to 2
76. other than one in the ROM area code area If a ROM code is ordered work known as across processing or tape out in this status an error occurs 4 Notes on manipulation specification of Object Converter If starting is specified by the object converter option U filling is started from the start address or the address where the code is located whichever is lower The SFR area FFOOH to FFFFH is not filled Description format U filling value Start Size may be omitted 5 Notes on memory directives The default memory area name of each device cannot be erased Set the size of the default memory area name not used to O Some segments however are allocated to the default area Bear this in mind when changing the area name For the default memory area name refer to the User s Manual of the device to be used 6 Notes on debug option If debug information is output by the C compiler structured assembler preprocessor and the compiler structured assembler is executed do not output the debug information when the output assemble source is assembled specify this by using the NGA option If the debug information is output debugging may not be executed at the C compiler structured assembler source level 380 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B NOTES ON USE 7 Notes related to 78 Several points must be noted when C source level debugging is executed by assembling the assembler source output by t
77. output segment s 2FH byte s real data 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000 SIZE 8000H 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx Public symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME SAMPM ADDR 0000H MAIN SAMPM ADDR 0080H START SAMPS ADDR 0093 CONVAH Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Date xx xxx xxxx Page Date xx xxx xxx Page 2 Public symbol list 1 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER d KL NKL Syntax KL NKL Default assumption NKL Function Option KL outputs a local symbol list into a link list file Option NKL makes option KL unavailable Application Specify option KL to output a local symbol list into a link list file Explanation If options NKM NKP and NKL are all specified the link list file cannot be output If options NG is specified the local symbol list cannot be output If both options KL and NKL are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NP is specified option KL is unavailable User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 175 176 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Example of use Output a local symbol list into a link list file C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g pk0 map kl This references 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx Command kOmain rel k4sub rel g
78. parameter file Action by user Do not specify the F option inside a parameter file F6020 Message Parameter file read error file name Cause The parameter file cannot be read Action by user Specify a correct parameter file F6021 Message Memory allocation failed Cause There is insufficient memory Action by user Secure the necessary memory F6101 Message File is not 78K 0 file name Cause Input file name is not a 78K 0 file name F6102 Message Load module file is not executable file name Cause Attempted to input a file other than a load module file or attempted to convert a load module file created on an incompatible host machine F6103 Message Load module file has relocation data file Cause Address of load module file is not determined 358 User s Manual U17199EJ1 V0UM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 6 List Converter Error Messages tas a Error Message F6104 Message Object module file is executable file name Cause Object module file is in an executable format F6105 Message Segment name is not found in module file segment name Cause Segment name of object module file is not found in load module file F6106 Message Segment name is not found in object module file segment name Cause Segment name of assemble list file is not found in object module file F6107 Message Not enough memory Cause Memory is not suffici
79. pressing the Edit button or directly inputting a value Use Command File Check this option to create a command file Parameterfile f Read a user defined parameter file by pressing the Browse button or directly inputting a parameter file name Other Options To specify an option other than those that can be set in the dialog box enter it in the input box Caution The help specification option cannot be specified on PM plus Reset Resets the input contents Option data read Opens the lt Read Option Data gt dialog box and after the option data file has been specified reads this file Option data save Opens the lt Save Option Data gt dialog box and saves the option data to the option data file under the specified name Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 91 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 5 3 Edit option dialog box Items are edited in list format in the lt Edit Option gt dialog box The Edit Option dialog box is described below Figure 4 5 Edit Option gt Dialog Box Edit Option BE xj LIST T Add Up Delete Down Add Sub Directory Cancel Figure 4 6 lt Add Option gt Dialog Box x Cancel Add button Adds a list item If the item to be added is a file or directory the corresponding Browse for Folder dialog box opens
80. quality grade of NEC Electronics products is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics willingness to support a given application Note 1 NEC Electronics as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries 2 NEC Electronics products means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics as defined above M8E 02 11 1 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 3 Regional Information Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country Before using any NEC Electronics product in your application please contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors They will verify Device availability e Ordering information Product release schedule Availability of related technical literature Development environment specifications for example specifications for third party tools and components host computers power plugs AC supply voltages and so forth Network requirements In addition trademarks registered trademarks export restrictions and other legal issues may also vary from country to country
81. s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 7 MEMO 8 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 17 1 1 Assembler Overview 17 1 1 1 What is an assembler 18 1 1 2 Development process and RA78KO 19 1 1 8 What is a relocatable assembler 22 1 1 4 Advantages of a relocatable assembler 22 1 2 Overview of Features of RA78KO 24 1 2 1 Creating a source module file using an editor 25 1 2 2 Structured assembler preprocessor 26 1 2 3 Assembler 27 1 2 4 Linker 28 1 2 5 Object converter 29 1 2 6 Librarian 30 1 2 7 List converter 31 1 2 8 Debugger 32 1 3 Reminders Before Program Development 33 1 3 1 Maximum performance of RA78KO 33 1 4 Features of RA78KO 36 CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION 37 2 1 Host Machine and Supply Medium 37 2 2 Installation 38 2 2 1 Installation of Windows version 38 2 2 2 Installation of UNIX version 39 2 3 Installation of Device Files 40 2 3 1 Installation of Windows version 40 2 3 2 Installation of UNIX version 40 2 3 3 Registry registration of device files 40 2 4 Directory Configuration 41 2 4 1 Windows version directory configuration 41 2 4 2 UNIX version directory configuration 42 2 5 Uninstallation Procedure 43 2 5 1 Uninstallation of Windows version 43 2 5 2 Uninstallation of UNIX version 43 2 6 Environment Settings 44 2 6 1 Host machine IBM PC AT compatibles 44 2
82. searched the include file is searched the same order as the default assumption If anything other than a path name is specified after or if the path name is omitted an abort error occurs If I is used to specify 65 or more path names an abort error occurs Example of use Read an include file from directory c sample C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm ic sample Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 111 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 6 Assemble list file output specification Assemble list file output specification P NP Syntax P output file name NP Default assumption P input file name prn Function Option P specifies output of an assemble list file It also specifies the destination and file name of the output file Option NP makes option P KA KS KX LW LL LH LT and LF unavailable Application Specify option P to change the output destination or output file name of an assemble list file Specify option NP when performing assembly only to output an object module file This will shorten assembly time Explanation A file name can be specified as a disk type file name or as a device type file name However only CON PRN NUL and AUX can be specified as device type file names If CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur Ifthe output file name is omitted when option P is specified the assemble list file name becomes input file name prn
83. sym will be output to the specified path df both options S and NS are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence When a symbol having an ADDRESS or BIT attribute is defined for a segment located in extended space the object converter generates a separate symbol table file for each space All symbols which have NUMBER attribute are output to a symbol table file in normal space The file types of symbol table files generated for extended space are as follows Table 7 18 Type of Symbol Table File for Extended Space Normal Space Extended Space File REGULAR 1 2 EX4 EX5 i EX13 EX14 EX15 HEX hex S1 S2 53 54 55 7 513 514 515 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 225 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Example of use Output a symbol table file sample sym C gt 0c78k0 k0 Imf ssample sym 226 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 3 Specification of sort by object address order Specification of sort by object address order R NR Syntax R NR Default assumption R Function Option R outputs sorting of HEX format objects in order of address Option NR outputs HEX format objects in the order in which they were stored in the load module file Application Specify the NR option if the HEX format objects do not have to be sorted in address order Explanat
84. symbol _ STBEG creation option The following message is output to the display 78 0 Series Linker Vx xx xxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation Target chip uPD78054 Device file Vx xx Link complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found 7 Check the contents of drive C The linker outputs the load module file KO Imf and the link list file KO map If the option E is specified during linking the linker outputs an error list file 8 As the result of linking the output load module file KO Imf is converted to a HEX format file Enter the following on the command line C 0c78k0 kO0 Imf r uOFFH The following message is output on the display 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Target chip uPD78054 Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found 9 Check the contents of drive C The object converter outputs the HEX format object module file KO hex and the symbol table file kO sym 10 Create a library file as follows Register the object module file KOsub rel output by the assembler as a library file Enter the following on the command line C gt Ib78k0 lt k0 job The following message is output on the display 78 0 Series Librarian Vx xx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation
85. the syntax W1302 Message Duplicate PROCESSOR option and control Cause The device type specified in the C option is different to that specified in the PROCESSOR control instruction Program action The device type specified in the C option is valid and the device type specified in the PROCESSOR control instruction is ignored Action by user Check that the device type specified in the C option is correct 328 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 3 Assembler Error Messages Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages Error Message F2001 Message Missing input file Cause An input file has not been specified Action by user Specify an input file F2002 Message Too many input files Cause Two or more input files have been specified Action by user Specify only one input file F2004 Message Illegal file name file name Cause Either there are illegal characters in the file name or the number of characters exceeds the limit Action by user Input a file name that has legal characters and is within the character number limit F2005 Message Illegal file specification file name Cause An illegal file has been specified Action by user Specify a legal file F2006 Message File not found file name Cause The specified file does not exist Action by user Specify an existent file F2008 Message File speci
86. those attributes The linker can also specify location attributes in the link directive file of the linker 4 Correction of object codes When location addresses are buried in object codes the linker corrects the object code according to the location address determined in 3 above Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 147 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 3 Memory Spaces and Memory Areas A memory space is a space provided for defining memory areas A memory area is an area defined in memory for the allocation of segments Memory space 64 KB each Memory area Each memory space is divided into several memory areas The memory area declares the memory addresses for the installed memory Table 6 2 Segment Allocation Groups External ROM etc Memory Area Name Default Address Segments Allocated by Default ROM Internal ROM Until beginning of CSEG RAM if no ROM is installed RAM Internal RAM DSEG BSEG Remarks 1 Use a directive file to change the default address of a memory area or to specify the location of each segment written in a program Remarks 2 For specific examples refer to 3 4 5 Create a directive file 148 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 4 Link Directives A link directive hereinafter referred to as a directive is a group of instructions used to perform various directions during linking such as file input usable memory area and allocation of segments The role of the direc
87. to operate the program E5116 Message Sub command Buffer full Cause Limit for continuous line length in a subcommand 128 x 15 characters is exceeded Limit for length of 1 line in a subcommand 128 characters is exceeded E5117 Message Can not use device file Cause A device type file is specified in the input file CLOCK is specified in the list command of an input or output file PRN CON or CLOCK is specified in an output object module file or output library file E5118 Message Illegal path file file name Cause Path name in the specified file is incorrect W5201 Message Module not found module file name Cause The module for which REPLACE is specified is not in the library file F5901 Message File open error file file name Cause File cannot be opened F5902 Message File read error file file name Cause File cannot be correctly read F5903 Message File write error file file name Cause Data cannot be correctly written to file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 355 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 5 Librarian Error Messages u Error Message F5904 Message File seek error file file name Cause File seek error has occurred F5905 Message File close error file file name Cause File cannot be closed 356 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 7 List Converter Error Messages Table 12 6 List Converter Error Messages
88. up the object converter Remark An editor is used to create the parameter file The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows 218 User s Manual U17199EJ1 VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER A option A option A A Remarks 1 If the load module file name is omitted from the command line only one load module file name can be specified in the parameter file Remarks 2 The load module file name can also be specified after the option Remarks 3 Write in the parameter file all object converter options and output file names that should be specified in the command line Example Create the parameter file using an editor lt Contents of gt parameter file k0 Imf osample hex ssample sym r Use parameter file to start up the object converter 78 0 fk0 poc 7 3 2 Execution start and end messages 1 Execution start message When the object converter is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Xxxx 2 Execution end message If it detects no object conversion errors resulting from the object conversion the object converter outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the operating system Target chip uPD780xxx Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Co
89. 006 Message File not found file name Cause The specified file does not exist Action by user Specify an existent file F3007 Message Input file specification overlapped file name Cause The input file name has already been specified elsewhere Action by user Input a unique file name F3008 Message File specification conflicted file name Cause An I O file name has been specified in duplicate Action by user Specify different I O file names F3009 Message Unable to make file file name Cause The specified file is write protected Action by user Release the write protection on the specified file F3010 Message Directory not found file name Cause A non existent drive and or directory has been included in the output file name Action by user Specify an existent drive and or directory F3011 Message Illegal path option Cause Other than a path name has been specified in the option that specifies the path for the parameter Action by user Specify a correct path name F3012 Message Missing parameter option Cause A necessary parameter has not been specified Action by user Specify the parameter 340 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages ta Error Message F3013 Message Parameter not needed option Cause An unnecessary parameter has been specified Action by use
90. 05 Segment name is not found is load module file DATA Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 287 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 5 Parameter file specification Parameter file specification F Syntax F file name Default assumption With no input file Function Option F specifies input of options and the input file name from a specified file Application Specify option F when the data required to start up the list converter will not fit on the command line When you wish to repeatedly specify the same options each time list conversion is performed describe those options in a parameter file and specify option F Explanation Only a disk type file name can be specified as file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will occur If the file name is omitted an abort error will occur If only the primary name of the file name is specified the list converter will assign the file type and open the file Nesting of parameter files is not permitted If option F is specified within a parameter file an abort error will occur The number of characters that can be written within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or a line feed code LF Options and input file names written in a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specifi
91. 10C01400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2C In the case of the flash memory real address the code seen at address 18000H is described at address OCOOOH but the code part of 10th and subsequent byte does not change The codes remain as is and the address values are moved up At the same time the checksum values of the last byte of each line are also changed The user is not required to make special allowances for this change User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 383 APPENDIX B NOTES ON USE Table B 2 Example of output in Intel extended HEX format bank number CPU address 1000F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF10 020000020000FC 0601000013F3019A0080D8 020000020000FC 10010600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9 10011600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE9 10012600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD9 A0BFFOO0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF51 020000021000 04800000000000AFCD 020000021000EC 10800400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7C 10801400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6C The code at address 18000H is described as is at address 18000H 384 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX LIST OF OPTIONS In this chapter the program options are summarized in table form Please refer to these when developing programs This list of options can also be used as an index C 1 Structured Assembler Options Table C 1 Structured Assembler Options 1 Interpretation Class
92. 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 5 Librarian Error Messages Error Message F5016 Message Illegal parameter option Cause A mistake exists in the syntax of the parameter F5017 Message Too many parameters option Cause Total number of parameters exceeds limit F5018 Message Option is not recognized option Cause An incorrect option is specified F5021 Message Memory allocation failed Cause Memory allocation has failed F5024 Message Illegal character Cause An illegal character or character string is found F5025 Message Qualifier is not unique Cause The abbreviation type of the modifier is not unique F5026 Message Umbigous input redirect Cause No file name is specified after or D file name is specified more than once C5100 Message Internal error Cause An internal error has occurred E5101 Message Invalid sub command Cause Subcommand name is incorrect E5102 Message Invalid syntax Cause Parameter specification in subcommand is incorrect E5103 Message Illegal input file different target chip file file name Cause Specification of target device in input object module file is incorrect E5104 Message Illegal library file different target chip file file name Cause Specification of target device in library file is incorrect E5105 Message Module not found module file name Cause Specified module does not exist in libra
93. 146 KM LK78K0 169 elv 275 KM OC78K0 233 Environmental variable 44 316 KME OC78K0 233 201 KP LK78KO0 173 era 98 KS 78 0 115 Error list 295 303 310 311 313 KT 078 0 233 est 67 KX RA78K0 116 Execution Procedure 50 56 EXIT 267 L L LONV78KO 285 398 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM LANG78K 316 LF LB78K0 252 LF LK78K0 179 LF RA78KO 127 LH RA78K0 122 lib 146 241 LIB78KO 316 Librarian 30 241 Link Directive 149 Link list file 304 Linker 28 LIST 264 List converter 31 275 LL LB78K0 251 LL LK78K0 177 LL RA78K0 120 mf 146 201 275 Load module file 146 201 275 Local symbol list 309 481 241 LT RA78K0 125 LW LB78K0 250 LW RA78K0 118 M map 146 Map list 306 Maximum performance 33 MEMORY 150 Memory Area 148 Memory directive 151 Memory Space 148 MERGE 150 N NE LCNV78KO 287 NE LK78K0 180 NE OC78K0 230 NE RA78KO0 128 NG LK78K0 164 NG 78 0 107 NGA RA78K0 109 NGS 8 78 82 NJ LK78K0 163 NJ RA78K0 106 NKA 78 113 NKD LK78K0 171 NKL LK78KO 175 NKM LK78K0 169 LK78KO0 173 78
94. 17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 9 4 List Converter Options 9 4 1 Types of list converter options The list converter options are detailed instructions for the operation of the list converter List converter options are classified into 6 types Table 9 3 List Converter Options Classification Option Explanation Object module file input R Inputs an object module file specification Load module file input L Inputs a load module file specification Absolute assemble list file O Specifies output of an absolute assemble list file output specification Error list file output specification E Outputs an error list file Parameter file specification F Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Help specification Displays help message the display 9 4 2 Explanation of list converter options Each list converter option is described in detail on the following pages User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 283 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 1 Object module file input specification Object module file input specification R Syntax R input file name Default assumption R assemble list file name rel Function Option R specifies the input of an object module file Application When the primary name of an object module file is different from the primary name in the assemble list file or if its file type is not rel
95. 21FE MOVW STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 32 32 0080 63 MOV A B 33 33 0080 95 MOV DE A 34 34 008E 84 INCW DE 35 35 008F 62 MOV A C 36 36 0090 95 MOV DE A 37 37 38 38 0091 FAFE BR 39 39 40 40 END 278 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER Example 2 Embedding of object codes lt Assemble list gt 21 21 CSEG 22 22 0000 START 23 23 24 24 chip initialize 25 25 26 26 0000 11201A MOV HDTSA 1AH 27 27 0003 1620FE MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor 28 28 29 29 0006 R9A0000 CALL CONVAH convert ASCII HEX 30 30 output BC register ASCII code 31 31 0009 1421FE MOVW STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 32 32 000 63 MOV A B 33 33 0000 95 MOV DE A 34 34 000E 84 INCW DE 35 35 000F 62 MOV A C 36 36 0010 95 MOV DE A 37 37 38 38 0011 FAFE BR 39 39 40 40 END lt Absolute assemble list gt 21 21 CSEG 22 22 0080 START 23 23 24 24 chip initialize 25 25 26 26 0080 11201A MOV HDTSA 1 27 27 0083 1620FE MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor 28 28 29 29 0086 R9A9300 CALL CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX 30 30 output BC register lt ASCII code 31 31 0089 1421FE MOVW DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 32 32 008 63 MOV A B 33 33 0080 95 MOV DE A 34 34 008 84 INCW DE 35 35 008F 62 MOV A C 36 36 0090 95
96. 265 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 7 HELP HELP Syntax HELP Default assumption H Function The HELP command displays a help message on the display Explanation The help message is a list of the subcommands and explanations for each Specify the HELP command or option to refer to this message during librarian execution Example of use Specify the HELP command to output the HELP message help San TTT Subcommands create add delete replace pick list help exit Usage subcommand option masterLBF option transaction option transaction OMFname LBFname modulename lt create gt create masterLBF transaction lt add gt add masterLBF transaction lt delete gt delete masterLBF modulename lt replace gt replace masterLBF transaction lt pick gt pick masterLBF modulename lt list gt list option masterLBF modulename option p output public symbol np no output public symbol 0 filename specify output file name lt help help lt exit exit 266 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 EXIT EXIT Syntax EXIT Default assumption E Function The EXIT subcommand exits the librarian Explanation Use this subcommand to exit the librarian Example of use Exit the librarian exit
97. 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 Maximum Performance of Structured Assembler 33 Maximum Performance of Assembler 34 Maximum Performance of Linker 35 Supply Medium of Assembler Package 37 I O Files of Structured Assembler Preprocessor 67 Structured Assembler Options 73 I O Files of Assembler 93 Assembler Options 100 Order of Precedence of Assembler Options 102 Characters That Can Be Written as Titles 122 I O Files of Linker 146 Segment Allocation Groups External ROM etc 148 Types of Directives 149 Segment Location According to Combination of Memory Area Name Specification and Memory Space Name 154 Linker Options 159 Order of Precedence of Linker Options 161 I O Files of Object Converter 201 Output File Types for Extended Space 203 File Type When ZF Option Is Specified 203 Extended Tech Header Field 208 Character Values for Check Sum Evaluation 208 Data Block Format for Extended Tech 208 Termination Block Format for Extended Tech 209 Symbol Block Format for Extended Tech 210 Symbol Block Section Definition Fields for Extended 211 Symbol Block Symbol Definition Fields for Extended Tech 211 Motorola HEX File Record Types 212 General Format for Each Record 212 Meanings of Fields 213 Values of Symbol Attributes 217 Object Converter Options 221 File Type When ZF Option Is Specifi
98. 6 6 have no particular effect on other options However when the help option is specified all other options become unavailable 6 6 3 Explanation of linker options This section contains detailed explanations of each linker option Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 161 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 1 Load module file output specification Load module file output specification O NO Syntax O output file name NO Default assumption O input file name Imf Function Option O specifies the output of a load module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Option NO makes option O J and G unavailable Application Use option O to specify the location to which a load module file is output or to change its file name Specify option NO when performing a link only to output a link list file This will shorten link time Explanation The disk type file name and device type file name NUL and AUX can be specified as output file names Even if option O is specified if a fatal error occurs the load module file cannot be output f output file name is omitted when option O is specified the load module file input file name mf will be output to the current directory If only the path name is specified output file name input file name Imf will be output to the specified path df both options O and NO are specified at the same time
99. 6 will be specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the LIST subcommand is not specified option LL is ignored If option LL is specified 2 or more times the last specified item will take precedence Example of use Specify 20 as the number of lines per page in a list file C 1b78k0 120 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 251 252 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN c LF NLF Syntax LF NLF Default assumption NLF Function Option LF inserts a form feed FF code at the end of a list file The NLF option makes the LF option unavailable Application If you wish to add a page break after the contents of a list file are printed specify option LF to add a form feed code Explanation If the LIST subcommand is not specified option LF is ignored If both options LF and NLF are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Add a page feed code to a list file C gt lb78k0 If User s Manual U17199EJ1 VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 2 Specification of path for temporary file creation Specification of path for temporary file creation T Syntax T path name Default assumption Created in the path specified by the environmental variable TMP If no path is specified the temporary file is created in the current path Function Option T creates a te
100. 6 will be specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If option NP is specified option LL is unavailable Example of use Specify 20 as the number of lines per page in a link list file C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0 map 120 This references Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 177 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx Command kOmain rel kOsub rel 120 Para file Out file KOMAIN LMF Map file KO MAP Direc file Directive Link information 3 output segment 5 2FH byte s real data 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xxDate xx xxx xxxx Page 2 23 symbol s defined kkk Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 8000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx MEMORY LRAM BASE ADDRESS FACOH SIZE 0020H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE Date xx xxx xxxx Page SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 00000002H CSEG AT CODE SAMPM 0000H 00000002H gap 0002H 0000007EH CSEG 0080H 00000046H CSEG SAMPM 0080H 0000002AH CSEG SAMPS 0093H 0000001CH gap 00 0000FF3AH Date xx xxx xxxx Page 3 CSEG 178 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 LINKER b LF NLF Syntax LF NLF Default assumption NLF Function Option LF inserts a form feed FF code at the end of a link list file The option NLF ma
101. 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete Oerror s and 0 warning s found Structured assembler preprocessor for RA78K 0 Vx xx XX xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx start Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Conversion complete 0 error s found 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete Oerror s and 0 warning s found 58 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO Clear the screen 78 0 Series Linker Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Link complete and O0 warning s found Clear the screen 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx Xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Complete Oerror s and O0 warning s found Clear the screen List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 start Pass2 start Conversion
102. 78k0 A F parameter file name gt path name oc78k0 A F parameter file name Here is an example of its use C gt ra78k0 Fpara pra C gt Ik78k0 Fpara plk C 0c78k0 Fpara poc The parameter file is created with an editor All the options and output file names that should be specified on the command line can be written in the parameter file Here is an example of creating a parameter file with an editor lt Contents of 1 gt c054 kOmain asm e lt Contents of para1 plk gt kOmain rel kOsub rel bmylib lib osample Imf S lt Contents of para1 poc gt sample Imf uOFFH osample hex r 66 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR The structured assembler preprocessor inputs source module files written in the structured assembly language of 78KO Series microcontrollers converts them into assembly language and outputs them as secondary source module files 41 I O Files of Structured Assembler Preprocessor The I O files of the structured assembler preprocessor are as shown below Table 4 1 I O Files of Structured Assembler Preprocessor Type File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Source module files These are source module files written in None structured assembly language These files are created by the user Parameter files These are files that contain the options for
103. A CASE DEFAULT ENDS statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the CASE DEFAULT ENDS statement in the correct place E1217 Message Illegal ELSEIF ELSE ENDIF Cause An ELSEIF ELSE ENDIF statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the ELSEIF ELSE ENDIF statement in the correct place E1218 Message Illegal NEXT Cause A NEXT statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the NEXT statement in the correct place E1219 Message Illegal ENDW Cause An ENDW statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the ENDW statement in the correct place E1220 Message Illegal UNTIL UNTIL Cause UNTIL and UNTIL BIT statements have been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the UNTIL and UNTIL BIT statements in the correct place E1221 Message Missing ENDIF Cause The ENDIF statement is missing Action by user Write the ENDIF statement in the correct place E1222 Message Missing ENDS Cause The ENDS statement is missing Action by user Write the ENDS statement in the correct place User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 327 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages Error Message E1223 Message Missing ENDW Cause The ENDW statement is missing Action by user Write th
104. ADDR 6 DATA 7 16 31 Explanation of output items Table 10 7 Explanation of Cross reference Output Items Item Details 1 Defined symbol name 2 Symbol value 4 or 5 digits 3 Relocation attributes R Relocatable symbol E External symbol Blank Absolute symbol a Undefined symbol 4 Symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol DSEG Data segment name BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit BSEG Bit segment name SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit MAC Macro name SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit MOD Module name RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit SET Symbol defined by SET directive PSW bit NUM NUMBER attribute symbol Blank External reference symbol declared by kkkkk EXTRN EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol reference format EXT External reference symbol declared by EXTRN SADDR attribute EXTB External reference symbol declared by EXTBIT saddr bit External reference symbol declared by PUBLIC Blank Local symbol segment name macro name module name kkkkk V Defined symbol name User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 301 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST Table 10 7 Explanation of Cross reference Output Items Item Details Definition reference line no Definition line XXXXX Reference line XXXXX A A 1 blank EXTRN declaration EXTBIT declaration PUBLIC declaration xxxx
105. B78K0 254 Y LK78K0 186 Y OC78K0 234 Y RA78K0 134 Y Y 8 78 0 85 7 ZB LK78K0 188 ZE RA78K0 133 ZE 8 78 84 ZF OC78K0 235 ZN RA78K0 133 ZN ST78K0 84 ZS 78 133 ZS ST78K0 84 400 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM
106. C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm ks Reference kOmain prn The assemble list is output followed by the symbol list Symbol Table List VALUE RTYP NAME VALUE RTYP CSEG CSEG CSEG H EXT CONVAH DSEG FE20H ADDR HDTSA ADDR PUB MOD SAMPM OH ADDR PUB FE21H ADDR STASC NAME CODE DATA MAIN START User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 115 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER KX NKX Syntax KX NKX Default assumption NKX Function Option KX outputs an assemble list followed by a cross reference list into an assemble list file Option NKX makes option KX unavailable Application Specify option KX to output a cross reference list when you wish to know where and to what degree each symbol defined in a source module file is referenced in the source module or when you wish to know such information as which line of the assemble list a certain symbol is referenced on Explanation f both options KX and NKX are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If options KS and KX are specified at the same time KS is ignored If options NKA NKS and NKX are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If option NP is specified option KX is unavailable Notice Acontrol instruction with the same function as option KX NKX can also be written at the beginning of a source module A A XREF A AXR
107. CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 2 Functions of Librarian 1 Formation of a library of modules The assembler and linker create 1 file for every module they output This means that if a large number of modules are created the number of files also grows The RA78K0 therefore includes a function for collecting a number of object modules in a single file This function is called module library formation and a file which is organized as a library is called a library file A library file can be input to the linker By creating a library file consisting of modules common to many programs users can make file management and operation efficient and easy when performing modular programming Editing of library files The librarian incorporates the following editing functions for library files a Addition of modules to library files b Deletion of modules from library files Replacement of modules in library files Retrieval of modules from library files For detailed explanations of these functions refer to 8 5 Subcommands Output of library file data The librarian incorporates functions for the editing and output of the following items of data stored in library files a Module names b Created programs Date of registration d Date of update PUBLIC symbol data Caution The librarian performs functions 2 and 3 explained above using subcommands The librarian determines each subcommand in order while perform
108. Close the message box Message Cannot find folder Will you create Cause The specified folder does not exist Action by user Create a folder or select another folder Button Ok Creates a folder and close the message box Cancel Close the message box Message Not make folder Cause The specified folder could not be created Action by user Specify another folder Button OK Close the message box 372 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS This chapter is an introduction to the sample lists attached to the RA78KO User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 373 APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS kOmain asm NAME SAMPM HEX ASCII Conversion Program main routine PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH EXTRN _ STBEG DATA DSEG saddr HDTSA DS 1 STASC DS 2 CODE CSEG MAIN DW START CSEG START chip initialize MOVW SP QSTBEG MOV HDTSA 1AH MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor CALL CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code MOVW DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table A B MOV DE A INCW DE MOV A C MOV DE A BR END 374 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS 2 kOsub asm SAMPS FRI IIR e He e e e He He e I He e I I ITOK IK I IK III KI I IK II IK I AK IK HEX g
109. E ADDRESS FBOOH FE20H FE20H FE23H FFOOH Date xx xxxx Page SIZE 002H 0002H 0020H 0013H 001AH 7F53H SIZE SIZE 03H 0003H 0003H OODDH 0100H CSEG AT CSEG DSEG AT 1 list User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER b KD NKD Syntax KD NKD Default assumption KD Function Option KD outputs a link directive file into a link list file Option NKD makes option KD unavailable Application Specify option KD to output a link directive file into a link list file Explanation If options NKM NKP and NKL are all specified a link list file cannot be output If option NKM is specified a link directive file cannot be output into a link list file f both options KD and NKD are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NP is specified option KD is unavailable Example of use Output a link directive file into a link list file kO map C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dk0 dr kd This references Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 171 172 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xxDate xx xxx xxxx Page 1 Command kOmain rel kOsub rel kd Para file Out file KOMAIN LMF Map file KO MAP Direc file KO DR Directive file name Directive memory ROM 0h 4000h Content
110. Explanation of assembler options 103 5 5 Options Settings in PM plus 140 5 5 1 Option setting method 140 5 5 2 Option settings 142 5 5 3 Edit option dialog box 145 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 146 6 1 I O Files of Linker 146 6 2 Functions of Linker 147 6 3 Memory Spaces and Memory Areas 148 6 4 Link Directives 149 6 4 1 Directive files 149 6 4 2 Memory directives 151 6 4 3 Segment location directives 153 6 5 Linker Startup 156 6 5 1 Linker startup 156 6 5 2 Execution start and end messages 157 6 6 Linker Options 159 6 6 1 Types of linker options 159 6 6 2 Order of precedence of linker options 161 6 6 3 Explanation of linker options 161 6 7 Option Settings in PM plus 194 6 7 1 Option setting method 194 6 7 2 Option settings 197 6 7 3 Edit option dialog box 200 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 201 7 1 I O Files of Object Converter 201 7 2 Functions of Object Converter 203 7 2 1 How the object converter handles extended space 203 7 2 2 Flash ROM self rewriting mode support 203 7 2 3 HEX format object module files 204 7 2 4 Symbol table file 216 7 3 Object Converter Startup 218 7 3 1 Object converter startup 218 7 3 2 Execution start and end messages 219 7 4 Object Converter Options 221 7 4 1 Types of object converter options 221 7 4 2 Explanation of object converter options 222 7 5 Option Settings in PM plus
111. FFH 3 1 2 Configuration of sample program The following describes the sample program that is used as an example for the operations described below kOmain asm Main module kOsub asm Sub module mylib lib Library file this is not used here sample dr Directive file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 49 CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 3 2 Execution Procedure of RA78K0 The batch files ra bat in the system disk are used for the RA78KO operation The assembler linker object converter and list converter are executed in this order using kOmain asm and kOsub asm which are written in assembly language in ra bat as source files If an error occurs a message is output and the batch file terminates Specification of the type of device to be used as the target is input to this batch file Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS The following explanation uses the 780058 as the target device 50 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 ra bat batch program for verifying RA78KO operation 1 echo off cls set LEVEL 0 if 1 goto ERR BAT ra78k0 C 1 kOmain asm if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 ra78k0 C 1 kOsub asm if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 if LEVEL 1 echo Assemble error if LEVEL 1 goto END cls IK78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel s orasample mf prasample map if errorlevel 1 echo Link er
112. He e e I e He He KI He He I He e e He e e TOK e He He IA IK RI IR e He e I k k kk k k k k III I He e e II IIR ITI e He e IIA User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 119 120 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER b LL Syntax LL number of lines Default assumption LL66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function Option LL changes the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in an assemble list file Application Specify option LL to change the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in an assemble list file Explanation The range of number of lines that can be specified with option LL is shown below 20 lt number of lines printed on 1 page lt 32767 If a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs If the number of lines is omitted 66 will be specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If option NP is specified option LL is unavailable Notice control instruction with the same function as option LL can also be written at the beginning of a source module A A LENGTH For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use Specify 20 as th
113. ION 2 3 Installation of Device Files Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS which can be accessed from the following Website http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html 2 3 1 Installation of Windows version Use the device file installer to install the device files The device file installer is installed at the same time as the RA78KO 2 3 2 Installation of UNIX version Either specify the directory for device files with the y option or specify the directory example y nectools dev and copy the device files to a directory with the assembler execution format example nectools bin 2 3 3 Registry registration of device files If the device files are already installed a message prompting you to perform registry registration of the device files may be displayed during RA78KO installation If currently using a 32 bit environment register the device file used for the RA78KO Ver 3 30 or earlier 16 bit environment to a registry 32 bit environment Registry registration can also be done using the device file installer after RA78KO installation has been completed The registry registration procedure is as follows 1 Startup of device file installer 2 Source selection Click the Browse button and select NECDEV INI used in the 16 bit environment Select a file registered to a registry from the device file displayed in the source list box 3 Move
114. If a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs If LTO is specified tabulation processing will not be performed and a tabulation code will be output If option NP is specified option LT is unavailable Notice control instruction with the same function as option LT can also be written at the beginning of a source module A A TAB A number of tabs For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 125 126 Example of use Example 1 sample prn is referenced when option LT is omitted CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT MI SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 NAME SAMPLE 2 2 3 3 CODE CSEG 4 4 0000 63 MOV A B 5 5 0001 619A SET1 6 6 END Example 2 1 blank is specified using the HT code C gt ra78k0 c054 sample asm lt1 This references sample prn Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT MI SOURCE STATEMENT 03 WN CODE 0000 63 0001 619A oo WO NAME SAMPLE CSEG MOV A B SET1 END Remark The number of blanks entered by the HT code is 1 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER e LF NLF Syntax LF NLF Default assumption NLF Function Option LF inserts a form feed FF code at the end of an assemble list file T
115. MOV DE A 37 37 38 38 0091 FAFE BR 39 39 40 40 END User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 279 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 9 3 List Converter Startup 9 3 1 List converter startup The following two methods can be used to start up the list converter 1 Command line startup 78 0 A option input file name A option T T T 4 8 b d a Current drive name b Command file name of the list converter c Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the list converter Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks d Primary name of assemble list Specify the file name of a path that includes a space by enclosing it in a pair of double quotation marks Example C lcnv78k0 kOmain IkO Imf Cautions 1 In c above when specifying two or more list converter options separate the list converter options with a blank space For a detailed explanation of list converter options refer to 9 4 List Converter Options Cautions 2 Use the extension prn for d above Cautions 3 In d above if only the primary name of the assemble list is specified in the command line the primary names of the object module file and load module file must be identical to the primary name of the assemble list file The file types must also be as shown below Table 9 2 Type of Specification File When List Converter Is Started Fi
116. NSTALLATION 2 6 Environment Settings 2 6 1 Host machine IBM PC AT compatibles The 78 runs on a machine with a 32 bit CPU such as i386 or above Because the assembler package runs with a 32 bit CPU by using DOS Extender it is designed to run on the following OSs DOS prompt of Windows 98 Me Command prompt of Windows 2000 XP NT 4 0 A protect memory of 7M bytes or more is necessary for operation The restrictions on the environmental variables of each OS are as follows 2 6 2 Environmental variables Set the following environmental variables If the assembler package has been installed using the Windows installer the necessary environmental variables are automatically set PATH Specifies the directory to which the executable format of the assembler is stored TMP Specifies a directory where a temporary file is to be created valid only with the IBM PC AT compatibles INC78K0 Specifies a directory where the include file is searched LIB78KO Specifies the directory where a library is searched if the library is used LANG78K Specifies the kanji code 2 byte code described in the comment Example With IBM PC AT compatibles PATH PATH cANECTools32bin set TMP c tmp set INC78K0 c NECTools32 inc78k0 set LIB78KO c NECTools32 lip78k0 set LANG78K SJIS With HP9000 Series 700 or SPARCstation Series Example when csh is used gt set path path 78 se
117. Not kx nkx Output the cross reference list to print file Not Iw width Specify print file columns per line lI length Specify print file lines per page lf nlf Add Form Feed at end of print file Not t n Expand TAB character for print file n 1 to 8 Not expand n 0 Ihstring Print list header with the specified string g ng Output debug information to object file Not j nj Create object file if fatal error occurred Not idirectory directory Set include search path tdirectory Set temporary directory ydirectory Set device file search path ffile Input option or source module file name from specified file ga nga Output assembler source debug information to object file Not dname data name data Define name with data common Create the common object module file for 78KO Series self Use Self programming zs ze zn Change source regulation zs SJIS code usable in comment ze EUC code usable in comment zn no multibyte code in comment Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o ne p ka nks nkx lw132 1166 nlf It8 g nj ga User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 139 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 Options Settings in PM plus This section describes the method for setting assembler options from PM plus 5 5 1 The lt Assembler Options gt dialog box is opened if Assembler O
118. PENDIX B NOTES ON USE 13 HEX output modes in bank supported products 382 In the bank supported products addresses are seen in two types of view bank number CPU address and the flash memory real address Hex Format Bank Figure B 1 Address View 5BFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 58000H 4BFFFH 48000H BANK4 16K bytes 3BFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 38000H 1FFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 1C000H 2BFFFH 1BFFFH BANK 16K bytes BANKA 16K bytes 28000H 18000H 17FFFH BANKS 16K bytes 14000H 1BFFFH 13FFFH BANK1 16K bytes BANK 16K bytes 18000H 10000H OFFFFH BANK1 16K bytes 0C000H OBFFFH OBFFFH BANKO 16K bytes BANKO 16K bytes 08000H 08000H 07FFFH 07FFFH Common 32K bytes Common 32K bytes 00000H 00000H bank number CPU address flash memory real address Hex Format Bank The assembler references an address based on the bank number CPU address so the user is conscious of this bank number CPU address When performing self programming or on board programming to the flash memory however programming must be performed based on the flash memory real address Therefore the object converter outputs the HEX format object module file with the flash memory real address thereby address translation from bank number CPU address to the flash memory real address during self programming or by the programmer is no longer required The HEX output based on the
119. PTER 8 LIBRARIAN 6 LIST LIST Syntax LIST A option A library file name A module name A Option PUBLIC NOPUBLIC OA file name Default assumption L Function The LIST subcommand outputs data on modules in a library file Explanation Multiple options may be specified 0 A device type file name can be specified as the output file name If the output file name is omitted an error occurs If the file type is omitted the librarian assumes that input file name LST is entered PUBLIC NOPUBLIC This option can be selected by specifying only the underlined characters PUBLIC specifies output of public symbol data NOPUBLIC makes PUBLIC unavailable If PUBLIC and NOPUBLIC are specified at the same time the last specified option takes precedence 264 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Example of use Output a module data in a library file kO lib to a list file kO Ist Specify option P so that public symbol ata will be output list p okO0 Ist k0 lib List file kO Ist is referenced 78K 0 Series librarian Vx xx DATE xx xxx xx PAGE 1 LIB FILE NAME KO LIB XX xxx XX 0001 M1 REL XX XXX XX sym2 sym3 NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 3 0002 M3 REL XX XXX XX NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 0 0003 M2 REL XX XXX XX biti bit2 NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 2 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM
120. R MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages 55 2617 Message Missing ENDM Cause ENDM statement required by macro definition directive is missing E2618 Message Illegal syntax of ENDM Cause ENDM statement is incorrect E2619 Message Illegal defined macro Cause Referenced macro is incorrectly defined E2620 Message Illegal syntax of actual parameter Cause Specification of actual parameter of macro is incorrect E2621 Message Nesting over of macro reference Cause The limit on nesting in a macro reference 8 levels is exceeded E2622 Message Illegal syntax of EXITM Cause EXITM statement is incorrect E2623 Message Illegal operand of REPT Cause An unpermitted expression is specified in the operand of a REPT directive E2624 Message More than RAFFFF Cause More than 65535 local symbols are replaced during macro development E2625 Message Unexpected ENDM Cause An unexpected ENDM is found E2626 Message Can t describe LOCAL outside macro definition Cause LOCAL directive is specified in a normal source statement other than a macro body E2627 Message More than two segments in this include macro Cause 2 or more segments are found in an include file macro body rept endm block or irp endm block W2701 Message Too long source line Cause Over 2048 characters are described on 1 line of a source statement Program 2049th and sub
121. RTER 9 5 2 Option settings The various options in the lt List Converter Options gt dialog box are described below lt lt Output gt gt Tab Operate List Converter Check this option to start the list converter Absolute Assemble List Path o Specify the path of the absolute assemble list by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path Create Error List File e Check this option to output an error list file Output Path Specify the path of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Others gt gt Tab Use Command File Check this option to create a command file Parameterfile f Specify the file to be input as a user defined parameter file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a file name Other Options To specify an option other than those that can be set in this dialog box enter the option in the input box Caution The help specification option cannot be specified on PM plus Reset Resets the input contents Option data read Opens the lt Read Option Data gt dialog box and after the option data file has been specified reads this file Option data save Opens the lt Save Option Data gt dialog box and save the option data to the option data file with a name Command Line Options
122. Specify the Security ID in the correct format and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid Security ID Security ID is specified in hexadecimal numbers Cause The specified Security ID is not in the correct format Action by user Specify the Security ID in the correct format Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid Security ID Missing parameter Cause A Security ID has not been input Action by user Input a Security ID Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many files for Library File Up to 10 can be specified for Library File Cause A number of library files outside the input limit range is specified Action by user Specify a number of library files within the limit range Button Ok Close the message box Message library file Too long file name for Library File Cause The file name specified as a library file has a number of characters outside the limit range Action by user Retry with a number of characters within the limit range Button Ok Close the message box Message library file Multiple Library File definition Cause Library files are described in duplicate Action by user Delete the duplicate library file s and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many path for Library File Search Path Up to 64 can be specified Cause A number of
123. TER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF 78 11 4 Making Assemble List Easy to Read Display a title in the header of an assemble list using option LH or the TITLE control instruction By displaying a title that briefly indicates the contents of the assemble list the contents of the assemble list can be made easy to see at a glance When the SUBTITLE control instruction is used a subtitle can also be displayed For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual Example of use Print a title in the header of an assemble list file gt 78 c054 kOmain asm IhRA78K0 MAINROUTINE This references kOmain prn 78K 0 Series Assembler Ex xx 8 MAINROUTINE Date xx xxx xxxx Page 1 Title Command c054 kOmain asm IhNRA78KO_MAINROUTINE Para file In file KOMAIN ASM Obj file KOMAIN REL Prn file KOMAIN PRN Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 2 2 NAME SAMPM 3 3 obooooonoeeeeeeeeee EREKE KEEKEEKE KARKR 4 4 57 5 5 HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program 6 6 7 7 main routine 318 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF 78 11 5 Reducing Program Startup Time 11 5 1 Specifying control instruction in the source program Control instructions which have the same functions as the options normally specified in assembler startup can be specified in advance in the source program This el
124. This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 293 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST The following is an explanation of the formats and other information for the lists output by each program Lists Output by Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error list Lists Output by Assembler Assemble list file header Assemble list Symbol list Cross reference list Error list Lists Output by Linker Link list file header Map list Public symbol list Local symbol list Error list List Output by Object Converter Error list List Output by Librarian Library data output list Lists Output by List Converter Absolute assemble list Error list 10 1 Lists Output by Structured Assembler Preprocessor The structured assembler preprocessor outputs the following lists Table 10 1 Lists Output by Structured Assembler Preprocessor Output List File Name Output List Name Error list file Error list 294 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 1 1 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the structured assembler preprocessor is started up Output format Start 1 TTT S 2 4 RA78KO 3 error 4 E1221 5 Missing ENDIF Explanation of output items Table 10 2 Explanation of Error List Output Items when the structured assembler preprocessor is started up Item Details
125. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 15 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 15 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http www renesas com inquiry 24 NC S AS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
126. U17199EJ1VOUM 247 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 3 2 Execution start and end messages 1 Execution start message When the librarian is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78 0 Series Librarian Vx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx 2 Execution end message The librarian does not output an execution end message When the user enters the EXIT subcommand after all processing is complete the librarian returns control to the operating system create kO lib add kO lib kOmain rel kOsub rel exit If the librarian detects a fatal error which makes it unable to continue librarian processing the librarian outputs a message to the display and returns control to the operating system Example A non existent librarian option is specified C gt lb78k0 a 78K 0 Series Librarian Vx xx xx Xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx RA78KO error F5018 Option is not recognized z Usage LB78KO0 options In the above example a non existent librarian option is specified An error results and the librarian aborts librarian execution When an error message is displayed and library formation is aborted look for the cause in CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES and take action accordingly 248 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 4 Librarian Options 8 4 4 Types of librarian options The li
127. User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 5 Option Settings in PM plus This section describes the method for setting object converter options from PM plus 7 5 1 Option setting method The lt Object Converter Options gt dialog box is opened if Object Converter Options is selected from the Tools menu of PM plus or if the OC button on the toolbar is pressed Object converter options can be set by inputting the required options in this dialog box Figure 7 6 lt Object Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected Object Converter Options Dutputl Others Output File Name Browse v Object Complement u Value FF H Start Address H Size H Sort HEX Object by Address Divide HEX File for the Product with Flash ROM zf Command Line Options Cancel Apply Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 237 238 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Figure 7 7 lt Object Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Is Selected LIT i x Output Dutpu2 Others Output File Name Poo Browse mT Create Error List File e Output File Name Browse Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help Figure 7 8 lt Object Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected Object Converte
128. VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS 4 test2 s include testinc s PUBLIC SEARCH CSEG Data search input HL search data address i A DE table top address 5 output CY 1 not find 0 find DE lt table address SEARCH while DE 0 BC 0 A DE PUSH HL PUSH DE while DE HL A DE HL if C 22 0 POP DE POP HL CLR1 CY RET endif C endw POP DE POP HL A DE E A A B ADDC D A endw SET1 CY RET END Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 377 APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS 5 testinc s PUBLIC STABLE Data table CSEG STABLE DB 03 12H 34H 78H DB 04 55H 66H 77H 88H DB 05 12H 34H 56H 78H 10H DB 03 12H 34H 56H DB 04 12H 34H OAH 78H DB 04 12H 34H 56H 70H DB 04 12H 34H 56H 78H DB 01 OABH DB 02 34H 78H DB 00 378 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS A 6 st bat echo off cls set LEVEL 0 if 961 goto ERR BAT st78k0 C 1 test1 s ra78k0 test1 asm if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 st78k0 C 1 test2 s ra78k0 test2 asm if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 if LEVEL 1 echo Assemble error if LEVEL 1 goto END cls Ik78kO test1 rel test2 rel s otest Imf ptest map if errorlevel 1 echo Link error if errorlevel 1 goto END cls oc78k0 test if errorlevel 1 echo Object conversion error if errorlevel 1 goto END cls set LEVEL 0 Ic
129. VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 st bat ST78K0 operation verification batch program echo off cls set LEVEL 0 if 1 goto ERR BAT st78k0 C 1 test1 s ra78k0 test1 asm if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 st78k0 C 1 test2 s ra78k0 test2 asm if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 if Y LEVEL 1 echo Assemble error if LEVEL 1 goto END cls IK78k0 test1 rel test2 rel s ostsample Imf pstsample map if errorlevel 1 echo Link error if errorlevel 1 goto END cls oc78k0 stsample if errorlevel 1 echo Object conversion error if errorlevel 1 goto END cls set LEVEL 0 Icnv78k0 Istsample Imf rtest1 rel test1 prn if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 Icnv78k0 Istsample Imf rtest2 rel test2 prn if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 if YLEVEL 1 echo List conversion error if YLEVEL 1 goto END cis echo No error goto END ERR BAT echo Usage st bat chiptype END echo on User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 1 Execute the batch file Specify the target device type and execute the ST78KO operation verification batch program C st bat 0058 The following message is output to the display Structured assembler preprocessor for RA78K 0 Vx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx start Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Conversion complete 0 error s found
130. age Language User s Manual U17198E hereinafter referred to as the Language Manual The contents of this manual are intended for use with Ver 3 80 or later of the RA78KO Target Readers The RA78KO is intended for users who understand the functions and instructions of the microcontroller for which software is being developed 78KO Series Organization This manual consists of the following eleven chapters and appendixes CHAPTER1 GENERAL Outlines the role of the RA78KO in microcontroller software development and the features of the RA78KO CHAPTER2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION Explains the program file names and operating environment provided by the RA78KO CHAPTER3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO0 Explains the procedure for developing software using a sample program The purpose of this chapter is to provide an opportunity for actual use of each program Those who wish to experience operating the RA78KO should read this chapter CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR CHAPTER5 ASSEMBLER CHAPTER6 LINKER CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN CHAPTER9 LIST CONVERTER CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST Explains the formats of the lists output by each program CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF 78 Introduces some measures for optimum utilization of the RA78KO CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Explains the error messages output by each program APPENDIXES Introduce a list of program options a list of sample programs and a list o
131. ages 1 Execution start message When the assembler is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx 2 Execution end message If it detects no assembly errors resulting from the assembly the assembler outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the operating system Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects an assembly error resulting from the assembly the assembler outputs the error number to the display and returns control to the operating system Pass1 Start KOMAIN ASM 12 RA78KO error E2201 Syntax error Pass2 Start KOMAIN ASM 12 RA78KO error E2201 Syntax error KOMAIN ASM 29 RA78KO error E2407 Undefined symbol reference CONVAH KOMAIN ASM 29 RA78KO0 error E2308 Illegal expression Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found If the assembler detects a fatal error during assembly which makes it unable to continue assembly processing the assembler outputs a message to the display cancels assembly and returns control to the operating system 98 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example 1 A non existent source module file i
132. al ROM range b U Complement value size From address 0 to the size 1 address c U Complement value start size From start address to start address size 1 address Example of use Complement an address area to which a HEX format object has not been output with code In the following example it is supposed that a HEX format object module file exists In this case code cannot be written to the address area 00 to OFFFH 020000000200FC 100002002B41000BFC80FE2B40000944F7083A20EC 201 100012001A6720FE2822006521FED350D25014FE1A 210 10002200B900059F2835002431B900059F28350005 1 0 003200242156 8302 807 830560 01000003 500400826 2 1010100024A5F622B667 2 00000001 FF 1000H OFFFH Code is complemented to this area 003EH 003DH 0002H 0001H 0000H is complemented to the address area 003EH to OFFFH C gt 0c78k0 k0 Imf uOOh 003eh Ofc2h Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 229 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 5 Error list file output specification Error list file output specification E NE Syntax E output file name NE Default assumption NE Function Option E specifies the output of an error list file Option E also specifies the output destination and output file name Option NE makes option E unavailable Application Specify option E to change the output destinat
133. ames CON PRN and CLOCK are specified an abort error results Even if option O is specified if a fatal error occurs the object module file cannot be output If the drive name is omitted when option O is specified the object module file will be output to the current drive f the output file name is omitted when option O is specified the output file name will be input file name rel If both options O and NO are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Specify output of object module file sample rel C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm osample rel User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 105 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 3 Forced object module file output specification Forced object module file output specification J NJ Syntax J NJ Default assumption NJ Function Option J specifies that the object module file can be output even if a fatal error occurs Option NJ makes option J unavailable Application Normally when a fatal error occurs the object module file cannot be output When you wish to execute the program with a notice that a fatal error has occurred specify option J to output the object module file Explanation When option J is specified the object module file will be output even if a fatal error occurs df both options J and NJ are specified at the same time the option specified last takes p
134. and NLF FF code at the end NLF are specified at the of a list file same time the option specified last takes NLF Makes the option LF precedence unavailable Specification T path name Creates a temporary Independent Created in the of path for file in a specified path specified temporary path by the file creation environmental variable TMP Device file Y path name Reads a device file Independent lt dev gt for the search path from the specified Ib78k0 startup specification path path Help Displays a help All other options are No display specification message on the unavailable display User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 395 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS C 6 List of List Converter Options Table C 6 List of List Converter Options Interpretation 396 lassificati i i i Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Object R file name Specifies the input of Independent R assemble module file an object module file list file input name rel specification Load module L file name Inputs aload module Independent L assemble file input file list file specification name Ink Absolute O file name Outputs an absolute Independent O assemble assemble list assemble list file list file name p file output specification Error list file E file name Outputs an error list If both options E and NE NE output
135. anything other than a numeric value is specified an abort error occurs If no program size is specified 256 bytes are assumed For details of the program size refer to the document supplied with the 1078 If the GO option is specified no segment can be allocated to addresses 02H to and 84H and area of specified program size 1 that starts from address 8FH If this option is specified for a device that does not have an on chip debug function an error occurs Example of use Allocate addresses 8FH to 18FH 256 bytes 1 byte as the program allocation area for on chip debugging C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel go256 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 189 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 18 Security ID specification Security ID specification Gl Syntax GI security ID Default assumption A security ID is not set Function Specifies a security ID Application Specify the GI option to set a security ID Explanation Specify a hexadecimal value that ends with H If any other value is specified an abort error occurs Specify a security ID within 10 bytes If the specified security ID falls short of 10 bytes the higher bits are filled with O The security ID is set at addresses 85H to 8EH If a security ID is set no segment can be located at addresses 85H to 8EH If this option is specified for a device that does not have a security ID function an error occurs
136. asm no Iw80 If The options LW and LF are unavailable Items marked with a A When all three of the options in the horizontal axis are specified the option shown in the vertical axis option is unavailable Example C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm p nka nks nkx The options NKA NKS and NKX are all specified at the same time so option P is unavailable When an option and its N counterpart are specified at the same time for example both O and NO only the last of the 2 options is available Example C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm o no The option NO is specified after O so option O is unavailable and NO is available Options not described in Table 5 3 have no particular effect on other options However when the help option is specified all other options become unavailable 102 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 4 3 Explanation of assembler options The assembler options are described in detail on the following pages User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 103 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 1 Device type specification Device type specification C Syntax C device type Default assumption Cannot be omitted Function Option C specifies the device type of the target device Application Use option C sparingly The assembler performs assembly for the target device and generates an object code for that device Explanation For the target dev
137. ath Cause A number of include file paths outside the input limit range is specified Action by user Specify a number within the limit range Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many characters for Include Search Path Cause The length of the include file path is specified as a number of characters exceeding the input range Action by user Specify a number of characters in the input range Button Ok Close the message box Message Include file path Multiple Include Search Path definition Cause Include file paths are described in duplicate Action by user Delete the duplicate path s and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many symbols for Symbol Definition Up to 30 symbols can be specified Cause A number of symbols exceeding the input range is described for the symbol definition Action by user Keep the number of symbols to within the usable range and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message symbol Too many characters for Symbol Definition Up to 31 characters can be described for symbol name Cause The length of the defined symbol is greater than the number of characters in the input range Action by user Keep the number of characters of the symbol to within the range and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message symbol Multiple symbol definition Cause A symbol i
138. bol Cause A reserved word has been specified in the D option Action by user Do not specify a reserved word in the D option F1106 Message Duplicate PROCESSOR control Cause The PROCESSOR control instruction has been specified more than once in the source file A product type different to that of the C option has been specified Action by user Specify the PROCESSOR control instruction once only Correct the product type name F1107 Message No processor specified Cause The device type has not been specified Action by user Specify the device type F1108 Message Illegal processor type specified Cause The device type specification is incorrect in the PROCESSOR control instruction in the source file Action by user Specify a correct device type F1109 Message Illegal processor type specified C Cause The device type specification is incorrect in the C option Action by user Specify a correct device type F1110 Message Can t use this control outside module header Cause An instruction that should have been written in the source module header has been written in a normal source line Action by user Write the instruction in the source module header F1111 Message Syntax error in module header Cause The syntax of the instruction written in the source module header is incorrect Action by user Write the instruction using the correct syntax User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 325 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 1 Struct
139. brarian options are used to specify the format of list files and the file creation path for temporary files Librarian options are classified into 4 types Table 8 2 Librarian Options Classification Option Explanation List file format specification LW Changes the number of characters that can be printed in 1 line in a list file LL Changes the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in a list file LF Inserts a page feed code at the end of a list file NLF Specification of path for T Creates a temporary file in a specified path temporary file creation Device file search path Y Reads a device file from a specified path specification Help specification E Displays a help message on the display 8 4 2 Explanation of librarian options The following is a detailed explanation of the library options Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 249 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 1 List file format specification List file format specification LW LL LF NLF a LW Syntax LW number of characters Default assumption LW132 80 characters in the case of display output Function Option LW changes the number of characters that can be printed in 1 line in a list file Application Specify option LW to change the number of characters that can be printed in 1 line in a list file Explanation The range of number of characters that can be specified with option
140. brary gt gt Tab Is Selected 195 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected 196 lt Edit Option gt Dialog Box 200 lt Add Option gt Dialog Box 200 I O Files of Object Converter 202 Intel Standard Format 205 Intel Extended Format 206 Motorola S Type Format 212 Symbol Value Formats 217 lt Object Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected 237 Object Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Is Selected 238 Object Converter Options Dialog Box When Others Tab Is Selected 238 I O Files of Librarian 242 Procedure for Creating Library File 244 lt Librarian Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected 268 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 13 8 5 8 6 9 2 9 3 1 14 lt Librarian Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected 269 lt Library File Name gt Dialog Box 272 lt Subcommand gt Dialog Box 273 I O Files of List Converter 276 lt List Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected 291 lt List Converter Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected 292 Address View 382 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM LIST OF TABLES Table No Title Page 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10
141. cannot be correctly read User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 359 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 6 List Converter Error Messages Nune Error Message F6903 Message File write error has occurred file name Cause Data cannot be correctly written to file F6904 Message File seek error has occurred file name Cause File seek error has occurred C6999 Message Internal error Cause Program internal error 360 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 8 PM plus Error Messages This section explains error messages that are not contained in the online help of PM plus For information on other PM plus error messages please refer to PM plus Online Help 12 8 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor ST78K0 Table 12 7 Error Messages Displayed by the Structured Assembler Preprocessor ST78K0 DLL Error Error Message x Message Cannot find ST78K0 EXE shown in environmental variable PATH Cause The ST78K0 EXE execution format is not in the specified directory Action by user Re install the RA78K0 assembler package Button OK Close the message box Message Cannot find folder Will you create Cause The specified folder does not exist Action by user Create a folder or select another folder Button Ok Creates a folder and closes the message box Cancel Close the message box Message Not make folder Cause The s
142. ce file will be searched Explanation The device file is read from the specified path If other than a path name is specified an error will occur Even if the directory specification symbol has not been written on the end of the directory the assumption will be that it has The device file will be searched in the following order i The path specified by the Y option ii lt dev gt for the path that activated st78k0 exe iii The path that activated st78k0 exe iv The current path v The path that was specified by the environment variable PATH Example of use It is specified that the device file be read from the directory c NECTools32 dev C gt st78k0 test s yc NECTools32 dev User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 85 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 13 Help specification Help specification Syntax Default assumption No display Function The option displays the help message on the screen Application The help message is a list of structured assembler options and their definitions Refer to this when executing the structured assembler preprocessor Explanation When the option is specified all other structured assembler options become invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from PM plus To reference PM plus help click the Help button in the lt Structured Assembler Preprocessor Options gt dialog box 86 Use
143. ce must not be inserted before or after The include file is searched in the following sequence i If two or more path names are specified following the I option the include file is searched in the specified order ii If two or more l options are specified the include file is searched with the option specified later taking precedence iii After the path specified by the I option is searched the include file is searched in the same order as the default assumption Ifa name other than a path name is specified following I or if no path name is specified an abort error occurs abort error occurs if 65 or more options are specified Example of use The directory with the include file is specified as c include C gt st78k0 test s ic include 78 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 6 Secondary source file specification Secondary source file specification O Syntax O drive directory Default assumption O input file name asm Function Specifies the output destination of the post conversion secondary source file and the file name Explanation Specify the output drive directory and file name of the post conversion secondary source file If the O option is omitted the output file is created in the current directory by replacing the file type of the input file with ASM
144. cessary for symbolic debugging as a symbol table file Figure 1 13 Function of Object Converter Note Device file Load module file Input Input Object Converter Output Output HEX format object module file Symbol table file Note Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS which can be accessed from the following Website http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 29 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 6 Librarian For convenience and ease of use a general purpose module with a clear interface may be stored in a library By creating a library multiple object modules can be stored in a single file making them easy to handle The linker incorporates a function which retrieves from the library file only the modules necessary When multiple modules are registered in a single library file the module files can be linked without the need to specify each individual module file name The librarian is the program used to create and update the library file Figure 1 14 Function of Librarian Object module files Object module files output by the output by the Device filgNote C compiler assembler Input Input Input Librarian Output Library file Note Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS which can be accessed from the following Website http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html 30 U
145. complete List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 start Pass start Conversion complete Clear the screen No error User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 2 60 1 test1 rel test1 prn test2 asm test2 rel test2 prn stsample mf stsample map stsample hex stsample sym test1 p test2 p CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 Check the contents of Drive C The following files are output Secondary source file Object module file Assemble list file Secondary source file Object module file Assemble list file Load module file Link list file HEX format object module file Symbol table file Absolute assemble list file Absolute assemble list file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO 3 Summary of ST78KO execution procedure The following is a summary of execution procedure of ST78K0 Figure 3 4 ST78K0 Execution Procedure Source module file module file Assembler Assemble list file Object module file Object module file Assemble list file Link list file Load module file Object converter Absolute Absolute assemble assemble list file list file Symbol table file HEX format object module file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 61 CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 3 4 Assembling Linking a
146. ctured assembler Y Library file Object module file LL Load module file a Assembler module file 8K0 2 RA7 List converter Absolute assemble list file HEX format object module file Symbol table file Integrated debugger Debugger Dedicated PROM In circuit parallel programmer emulator interface Flash programmer 24 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 1 Creating a source module file using an editor A single program can be divided into two or more modules according to function A single module can be used as a coding unit or an assembler input unit A module which is used as an input unit for the assembler is called a source module After the coding of each source module is finished the source module is written to a file using an editor The file created in this way is called a source module file A source module file is used as an assembler input file Figure 1 9 Creating Source Module File Program Source module Source module Source module Source module Writing to file editor Source module file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 25 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 2 Structured assembler preprocessor The structured assembler preprocessor is a program whose purpose is to create structured programming using assembly language instructions The structured assembler preprocessor inputs source programs written in structured assembly lang
147. d assembler source level be sure to specify the debug data output specification GS NGS When assembling the secondary source file be sure to specify the debug data output specification option G GA The structured assembler preprocessor outputs the required option to the secondary source file as a control instruction Example of use The output of debug data to the secondary source file is specified C gt st78k0 test s gs 82 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 10 Secondary source file forcible output specification Secondary source file forcible output specification J Syntax J Default assumption The secondary source file is not output when processing is stopped due to a fatal error Function Forcibly outputs the secondary source file when processing is stopped due to a fatal error Explanation The secondary source file is forcibly output when processing is stopped due to a fatal error The fatal error line outputs the image of the input source file as is to the secondary source file Example of use Forcible output of the secondary source file is specified C gt st78k0 test s j User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 83 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 11 Kanji code 2 byte code specification Kanji code specification ZS ZE ZN Syntax Default assumption nterpreted as follows depend
148. d at End of List File If Check this option to add a form feed code FF to the link list file Lines per Page II Specify the number of lines on one page of the link list file in a range of 20 to 32767 Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Library gt gt Tab Library File b Specify a file to be input as a library file by using the Edit button or directly inputting a path and file names Library File Search Path i Specify the path via which the library file is to be read by using the Edit button or directly inputting a path and file name Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Others gt gt Tab Directive File d Specify the file to be input as a directive file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Temporary Directory t Specify the file where a temporary file is to be created by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Create Stack Symbol s Check this option to allocate the maximum vacant area of the memory area as a stack area Area Name Specify a memory area name defined by the user or the memory area name defined by default Warning Level w Specify the warning message output level 0 Don t output warning message 1 Output normal warning message
149. does not exist Action by user Create a folder or select another folder Button Ok Creates a folder and close the message box Cancel Close the message box Message Not make folder Cause The specified folder could not be created Action by user Specify another folder Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of columns per line is from 72 to 2046 Cause A value exceeding the limit range is specified as the number of characters on one line Action by user Specify a value within the range Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of line per page is from 0 or 20 to 32767 Cause A value outside the limit range is specified as the number of lines on one page Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of TAB character is from 0 to 8 Cause A value outside the input limit range is described as the number of tabs up to an operand Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button OK Close the message box 364 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 8 Error Messages Displayed by the Assembler RA78K0 DLL Error Type Error Message Message Too many Include Search Path Up to 64 can be specified for Include Search P
150. e Normal Spac Extended Space File REGULAR 1 2 EX4 EX5 395 EX13 EX14 EX15 HEX hex H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 e H13 H14 H15 Example of use Output a HEX format object module file sample hex C gt 0c78k0 k0 Imf osample hex 224 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 2 Symbol table file output specification Symbol table file output specification S NS Syntax S output file name NS Default assumption S input file name sym The file type for extended space is S1 to S15 Function Option S specifies the output of a symbol table file Option S also specifies the output destination and output file name Option NS specifies that no symbol table file is output Application Specify option S to change the output destination and output file name of the symbol table file Specify option NS when performing an object conversion only to output a HEX format object module file This will shorten object conversion time Explanation Specify a disk type file name for the output file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will result If the output file name is omitted when option S is specified the symbol table file input file name sym will be output to the current directory If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name
151. e Create Error List File e When specified by common option Output Path Name To output an error list file specify the path of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name When specified by individual option Output File Name To output an error list file specify the path and file name of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Assembler Options Specify the assembler option for an assembler source module file Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed Use Assembler common option Check this option to enable the common option set in the lt Assembler Options gt dialog box Assembler Source Options Input a character string including an option name to enable the option for an output assembler source Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed 90 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR lt lt Others gt gt Tab Include Search Path i Specify the path via which the include file is to be read by pressing the Edit button or directly inputting a path name Word Symbol Character sc Specify the last character of a symbol when it is necessary to distinguish between bytes and words Symbol Definition d Inputs the value to be defined as a symbol by
152. e file name Cause A file input output error has occurred in the temporary file Action by user Output temporary file to another directory or create an open area in the specified disk C2921 Message Assembler internal error Cause An assembler internal error has occurred Action by user If the error cannot be resolved contact NEC Electronics an NEC Electronics distributor F2922 Message Insufficient memory in hostmachine Cause System does not have sufficient memory to execute assembler F2923 Message Insufficient memory for macro in hostmachine Cause Memory for macro became insufficient in the middle of macro processing Action by user Reduce number of macros defined User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 339 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 4 Linker Error Messages Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages eee Error Message F3001 Message Missing input file Cause An input file has not been specified Action by user Specify an input file F3004 Message Illegal file name file name Cause Either there are illegal characters in the file name or the number of characters exceeds the limit Action by user Input a file name that has legal characters and is within the character number limit F3005 Message Illegal file specification file name Cause An illegal file has been specified Action by user Specify a legal file F3
153. e ADDR DSEG Data segment name BIT BSEG Bit segment name SABIT MAC Macro name SFBIT MOD Module name RBIT SET Symbol defined by SET directive Blank NUM NUMBER attribute symbol kkkkk ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT attribute symbol addr bit BIT attribute symbol saddr bit BIT attribute symbol sfr bit BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit PSW bit External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol 3 Symbol reference format PUB External reference symbol declared by PUBLIC kkkkk Undefined symbol EXT External reference symbol declared by EXTRN SADDR attribute EXTB External reference symbol declared by EXTBIT saddr bit Blank Local symbol segment name macro name module name 4 Defined symbol name 300 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 2 4 Cross reference list A cross reference list outputs data indicating where on what line symbols are defined in a source module Output format Cross Reference List NAME VALUE R ATTR RTYP SEGNAME XREFS 1 CSEG 4 CSEG 6 CSEG 7 218 1 CODE 4 CSEG 6 CODE 7 188 1 CONVAH 2 H 3 E 5 EXT 7 12 29 1 DATA 4 DSEG 6 DATA 7 1484 1 HDTSA 2 FE20H 4 ADDR 6 DATA 7 15 26 1 MAIN 2 0H 4 ADDR 5 PUB 6 CODE 7119 198 1 SAMPM 4 MOD 7 28 1 START 2 0H 3R 4ADDR 5 6 CSEG 7 11 19 224 1 STASC 2 FE21H 4
154. e ENDW statement in the correct place E1224 Message Missing NEXT Cause The NEXT statement is missing Action by user Write the NEXT statement in the correct place E1225 Message Missing UNTIL UNTIL Cause The UNTIL and UNTIL BIT statements are missing Action by user Write the UNTIL and UNTIL BIT statements in the correct place E1226 Message Illegal character in a line Cause An incorrect character has been written in the source line Action by user Delete the incorrect character written in the source line E1227 Message Illegal operand in a line Cause The data size of the substitution and comparative condition formats is incorrect Action by user Specify the correct data size E1228 Message Illegal SFR access in operand Cause An sfr symbol that is unable to access the substitution format has been written Action by user Check the access status of the sfr symbols and write a correct sfr symbol E1229 Message This symbol is reserved symbol name Cause The symbol used is a reserved word Action by user Change the symbol name E1230 Message Out source line overflow Cause The number of characters on the source line has exceeded the limit Action by user Delete unnecessary descriptions on the source line W1301 Message Symbol redefinition Cause The symbol has been defined more than once by the define statement Program action The most recently defined symbol is valid Action by user To validate the symbol first defined correct
155. e equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under c
156. e is created Output Assemble list file Note Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS which can be accessed from the following Website http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 27 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 4 Linker The linker inputs the multiple object module files output by the compiler and the assembler and links them to output a single load module file linking must be performed even if only one object module file is input The linker determines the location addresses for the relocatable segments in the input modules This determines the values for the relocatable symbols and external reference symbols so that the correct values can be embedded in the load module file Figure 1 12 Function of Linker Device fijgNote Object module file Library file Directive file Input Input Input Input Output Output Load module file Link map file Note Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS which can be accessed from the following Website http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html 28 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 5 Object converter The object converter inputs the load module file output by the linker and converts the file format The resulting file is output as a HEX format object module file The object converter also outputs symbol data ne
157. e link Example 2 A non existent linker option is specified C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel z 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Xxxx RA78KO error F3018 Option is not recognized z Please enter LK78KO if you want help messages Program Aborted In the above example a non existent linker option is specified An error results and the linker aborts the link When an error message is displayed and link is aborted look for the cause in CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES and take action accordingly User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 6 Linker Options 6 6 1 Types of linker options The linker options are detailed instructions for the operation of the linker Linker options are classified into 19 types Table 6 5 Linker Options Classification Option Explanation Load module file output O Specifies the output of a load module file specification Forced load module file output J Forces output of a load module file specification NJ Debug data output specification G Outputs debugging data to a load module file NG Generation of stack decision S Automatically generates public symbols for stack symbols specification NE decision Directive file specification D Inputs the specified file as a directive file Link list file output specification P Spec
158. e number of lines per page in an assemble list file C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm 1120 This references kOmain prn 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx Command c054 kOmain asm 1120 Para file In file KOMAIN ASM Obj file KOMAIN REL Prn file KOMAIN PRN Assemble list 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT MI O oO WD NO oP WD 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT MI 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 Date xx Page 1 Date xx Page 2 SOURCE STATEMENT NAME SAMPM RI IK e He e k k k II k k K k KI k e He He e e HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program e main routine Date xx xxxx Page 3 SOURCE STATEMENT e RII III I II I e e I IK II I KK e e II I IK ITI I He e e III IK IAA PUBLIC MAIN START User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 121 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER c LH Syntax LH character strin Default assumption None Function Option LH specifies the character string printed in the title column of the header of an assemble list file Application Specify option LH to display a title that briefly explains the contents of an assemble list file By printing the title on each page the contents of the assemble list file can be understood at a glance Explanation
159. e of different memory areas gt Memory area 1 Memory area Memory area ROM ROM Memory area 1 REGULAR space REGULAR space EX1 space 2 Start addresses Specify the start address of the memory area to be defined Describe a numerical value from to FFFFFH 3 Size Specify the size of the memory area to be defined Specification conditions are as follows Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 151 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Describe a numerical value of 1 or higher If the size specification is changed to the default memory area size defined by the linker limitations on the definable range apply For the default memory area size defined for each device and the redefinable range for each device see the Notes on Use for each device file Memory space names The following 16 memory space names are displayed for 16 memory spaces of 64 KB each REGULAR EX1 EX2 EX3 EX4 EX5 EX6 EX7 EX8 EX10 EX11 EX12 EX13 EX14 EX15 Use memory space names to assign a memory area to a particular memory space The following conditions on specification of memory space names apply Memory space names must be specified entirely in uppercase characters When a memory space name is omitted REGULAR is assumed to be specified If the memory space name is omitted after is written an error occurs Function Define a specified memory space for a memory area specified with a memory area name 1 memor
160. e specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Create an error list file KO elk C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dkO dr ekO elk An error has occurred in the contents of the directive file kO elk is referenced KO DR 3 RA78KO error E3102 Directive syntax error 180 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 10 Library file specification Library file specification B Syntax B file name Default assumption None Function Option B specifies a file to be input as a library file Application The linker retrieves the module referenced by the input module from a library file and joins only that module to the input module The purpose of a library file is to register two or more modules in a single file By creating library files that can be used in common with many programs file management and operation become easier and more efficient Specify option B to input a library file to the linker Explanation Only a disk type file name can be specified as the file name The file name cannot be omitted If a file name which includes a path name is specified a library file will be input from that path If no library file exists in the specified path an error occurs If a file name which does not include a path name is specified a library file will be input from a path specified by option I or from the default searc
161. e system that uses this symbolic coding is called an assembly language Since machine language is the only programming language in which a microcontroller can handle programs however another program is required that translates programs created in assembly language into machine language This program is called an assembler Figure 1 2 Flow of Assembler Program written in Program coded in assembly language sets of binary Source module file Assembler Object module file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 1 2 Development process and RA78K0 1 Development of microcontroller related products and the role of RA78KO Figure 1 3 Development Process of Microcontroller Applied Products Product planning Hardware development Software development System design Logic design Software design Program coding in assembly language Manufacturing YES System evaluation Product marketing User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Figure 1 3 illustrates the position of assembly language programming in the product development process 19 20 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL A more detailed explanation of the software development process appears in Figure 1 4 Figure 1 4 Software Development Process Software development Creation of program specifications Coding a Creation of flowchart This uses the 78 assembly language
162. e to the directory to which the assembler package has been installed 42 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION 2 5 Uninstallation Procedure 2 5 1 Uninstallation of Windows version The procedure for uninstalling the files installed to the host machine is described below 1 Windows startup Power on the host machine and peripherals and start Windows Opening Control Panel window Press the Start button and select Settings Control Panel to open the Control Panel window Opening of Add Remove Programs window Double click the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window to open the Add Remove Programs window Caution On Windows XP Add or Remove Programs is displayed instead of Add Remove Programs Removing RA78KO0 After selecting NEC RA78K0 78K 0 Assembler Vx xx from the list of installed software displayed in the Install Uninstall tab in the Add Remove Programs window click the Add Remove button When the System Settings Change window is opened click the Yes button Confirmation of files Using Windows Explorer etc check that the files installed to the host machine have been uninstalled For the details of each folder refer to 2 4 Directory Configuration 2 5 2 Uninstallation of UNIX version The files copied in 2 2 2 Installation of UNIX version with the rm command Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 43 CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND I
163. e user Parameter files These files contain the parameters for the executed pra files These files are created by the user Output files Object module These are binary files including relocation data and rel files symbol data regarding machine language data and machine language location addresses Assemble list These are files containing assembly data such as prn files assemble lists and cross reference lists Error list files These are files containing error data generated during era assembly files Temporary files These are files created automatically by the assembler RAXxxxxx n for assembly purposes Temporary files are deleted n 1 4 when assembly ends User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 93 94 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Figure 5 1 I O Files of Assembler Include files Assembler source module files Parameter files Temporary files Assembler Assemble list files Object module files Error list files User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 2 Functions of Assembler 1 The assembler reads source module files and converts them from assembly language files into machine language files 2 If errors occur the assembler outputs an abort error If it finds the write error in the source module the assembler outputs a fatal error or warning error message If an abort error or fatal error message is output the object module file cannot be output normally However even
164. ecification characters be printed in 1 line in a list file LL number Changes the number If option NP is specified LL66 of lines of lines that can be option LL is unavailable printed in 1 page in an assemble list file LH Specifies the If option NP is specified None character character string option LH is unavailable string printed in the title column of the header of an assemble list file LT number Specifies a number of If option NP is specified LT8 of characters characters to be option LT is unavailable developed in a tab LF Inserts a form feed If both options LF and NLF FF code at the end NLF are specified at the of an assemble list same time the option file specified last takes precedence NLF Makes the option LF If option NP is specified unavailable option LF is unavailable Error list file E file name Outputs an error list If both options E and NE NE output file are specified at the specification same time the option Makes the option E unavailable specified last takes precedence 388 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS Table C 2 Assembler Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Parameter F file name Inputs assembler Independent Options and file options and the input input file names specification file name
165. ed 223 Type of HEX Format Object Module File for Extended Space 224 Type of Symbol Table File for Extended Space 225 I O Files of Librarian 241 Librarian Options 249 Subcommands 257 I O Files of List Converter 275 Type of Specification File When List Converter Is Started 280 List Converter Options 283 Lists Output by Structured Assembler Preprocessor 294 Explanation of Error List Output Items when the structured assembler preprocessor is started up 295 Lists Output by Assembler 296 Explanation of Assemble List File Headers Output Items 297 Explanation of Assemble list Output Items 298 Explanation of Symbol list Output Items 300 Explanation of Cross reference Output Items 301 Explanation of Error List Output Items when the assembler is started up 303 Lists Output by Linker 304 Explanation of Link List File Header Output Items 304 Explanation of Map List Output Items 306 Explanation of Public Symbol List Output Items 308 Explanation of Local Symbol List Output Items 309 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 15 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 B 2 1 4 C 6 D 1 16 Explanation of Error List Output Items when the linker is started up 310 Explanation of Object Converter Output Items 311 List Output by Librarian 312 Explanation of Library Data O
166. ed after option an abort error occurs The path from which the device file is read in the order determined as follows i Path specified by option Y ii lt dev gt for the oc78k0 exe startup path iii Path by which OC78KO was started up iv Current directory v The environmental variable PATH Example of use Specify the path for the device file as directory c 78k0 dev C gt o0c78k0 k0 Imf yc 78k0 dev 234 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 9 File separate output specification for flash ROM model File separate output specification for flash ROM model ZF Syntax 2 Default assumption Not separately output Function Specifies the first address of the flash ROM area Explanation Adds an option that outputs the boot area and other areas to separate HEX format files when linking the boot area ROM program of a flash ROM model is specified If the ZF option is specified the output file type at the boot area ROM program side is HXB and the output file type at the side of the other programs is HXF Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Example of use C gt 0c78k0 k0 Imf zf User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 235 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 10 Help specification Help specification Syntax Default assumption No d
167. ed by the user Parameter files These files contain the parameters for program plk execution These files are created by the user Output files Load module files These are binary image files which contain all data Imf created as a result of linking These files are input to the object converter Link list files These are list files which display the result of linking map Error list files These files contain error data generated during elk linking I O files Temporary files These files are automatically generated by the linker LKxxxxx n for use in linking They are deleted when assembly n 1 3 is complete 146 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 2 Functions of Linker The functions of the linker are as follows 1 Joining of input segments The linker determines and controls the location address of each segment The linker identifies identical segments and joins them into a single segment even if they are in separate object module files 2 Determination of input modules When a library file is specified for input the module to which an input object module file refers is retrieved from the library and handled as an input module 3 Determination of location addresses for input segments The linker determines location addresses for each segment of an input module If location attributes for a segment are specified in the source module file the segment is located according to
168. ed last will take precedence If option F is specified two or more times an abort error will occur All characters entered after or and before a line feed code LF or EOF will be interpreted as comments Example of use 288 Start up list converter using a parameter file The contents of the parameter file kO plv are as follows User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER parameter file kOmain Ik0 Imf ek0 elv Enter the following on the command line C gt Icnv78k0 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 289 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 6 Help specification Help specification Syntax Default assumption No display Function Option displays a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the list converter options Refer to these when executing the list converter Explanation When option is specified all other options are unavailable Caution This option cannot be specified on PM plus To reference PM plus help click the Help button in the lt List Converter Options gt dialog box Example of use When option is specified a help message is output on the display C gt Icnv78k0 List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx usage LCNV78KO option input file option
169. egistered If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the library file cannot be created Example of use 258 Register modules M1 and M2 at the same time as a library file is created create k0 lib m1 rel m2 rel lt Before file creation gt GS Se LI um ins M1 M2 Lees a lt After file creation gt M1 M2 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 2 ADD ADD Syntax ADD A library file name A transaction Default assumption A Function The ADD subcommand adds a module to a library file Explanation A module can be added to a library file even if no modules are currently stored in the library module with the same name as the module to be added already exists in the library file an error occurs If the module to be added carries the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file an error occurs Example of use Adda module to a library file kO lib add kO lib m3 rel Before addition gt k0 lib M1 M3 M2 lt After addition gt kO lib M1 M2 M3 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 259 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 3 DELETE DELETE Syntax DELETE A library file name A A module name A
170. embler for a segment whose link type is to be specified during link E3210 Message Segment segment name is not exist ignored Cause Segment specified in the directive does not exist E3211 Message Bank type mismatch symbol name in file file name ignored Cause A mismatch exists in the specified symbol bank number Action by user Confirm that the bank number of the symbol is correct E3301 Message Relocatable object code address out of range file file segment segment name address xxxxH type addressing type Cause Correction data of relocatable object code included in the input object module file is output to an address where no object code exists relocation entry address is out of range of origin data Action by user Check that symbol reference is correct E3302 Message Illegal symbol index in line number file file name segment segment name Cause Line number data for debugging included in the input object module file is incorrect and does not correctly reference the symbol data Line number index and symbol index do not correspond E3303 Message Can t find symbol index in relocatable object code file file name segment segment name address xxxxH type addressing type Cause Correction data of relocatable code included in the input object module file is incorrect and does not correctly reference the symbol data Relocation entry and symbol index do not correspond Action by us
171. end messages 1 Execution start message When the structured assembler preprocessor is activated an execution start message appears on the display Structured assembler preprocessor for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation Xxxx 2 Processing display message is displayed every 100 lines of the structured assembler preprocessor processing 3 Execution end message If no errors are detected the following message is output to the display and control is returned to the OS Target chip uPD78xxxx Device file Vx xx Conversion complete 0 error s found If errors are detected the number of detected errors is output to the display and control is returned to the OS TEST1 S 8 RA78KO error E1209 Syntax error Target chip uPD78xxxx Device file Vx xx Conversion complete 1 error s found If a fatal error is detected during structured assembly which makes it impossible to continue structured assembly processing the structured assembler preprocessor outputs a message to the display cancels the structured assembly processing and returns control to the OS Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 71 72 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR Example 1 When a non existent source module file is specified C gt st78k0 sample s Structured assembler preprocessor for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Elec
172. ent for program operation F6108 Message Load module file has no symbol data load module name Cause Option NG is specified in linker so symbol data in load module file cannot be output F6109 Message Overlay file can not open path name Cause Assembler overlay file cannot be opened F6110 Message Illegal assembler list file file name Cause Input assemble list is a file type other than an assemble list file W6701 Message Load module file is older than object module file load module file name object module file name Cause A load module file is specified which is older than the object module file W6702 Message Load module file is older than assemble module file load module file name assemble list file name Cause A load module file is specified which is older than the assemble list file W6703 Message Assemble list has error statement file name Cause An error exists in the assemble list W6704 Message Segment name is not found in assemble list file segment name Cause Segment name of object module file is not found in assemble list W6705 Message Segment data length is different segment name Cause Length of segment data in assemble list file is different from length of segment data in object module file Program Surplus segment data is ignored and processing continues processing F6901 Message File open error has occurred file name Cause File cannot be opened F6902 Message File read error has occurred file name Cause File
173. er 1 Startup from the command line X path name 78 A option load module file name A option A P 4 j a b c d e d a Current drive name o Current directory name c Object converter command file name This contains detailed directions for the action of the object converter Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks e File name of the load module to be converted Specify the file name of a path that includes a space by enclosing it in a pair of double quotation marks Example C 0c78k0 k0 Imf osample hex Caution If more than one object converter option is specified separate the options with a space For a detailed explanation of object converter options refer to 7 4 Object Converter Options 2 Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the object converter will not fit on the command line or when the same object converter option is specified repeatedly each time object conversion is performed To start up the object converter from a parameter file specify the specify parameter file option F on the command line Start up the object converter from a parameter file as follows 78 0 A load module file A f parameter file name T T a b a Specify parameter file option b A file which includes the data required to start
174. er Check that reference method of symbols and variables is correct E3304 Message Operand out of range segment segment name address xxxxH type addressing type Cause Operand value used in decision of relocatable object code is out of range for operand values corresponding to the instruction Action by user Describe the value for the operand in the source program that fits within the range determined for each addressing type E3305 Message Even value expected segment segment name address xxxxH type addressing type Cause The operand value used to determine the callt or saddrp addressing relocatable object code is an odd number callt and saddrp addressing operands must be even numbers 344 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages Error Number Error Message E3306 Message A multiple of 4 value expected segment segment name address xxxxH type addressing type Cause The value of the operand used for resolving the relocatable object code for saddr addressing is not a multiple of 4 F3401 Message File name Bad symbol table Cause Symbol data of input object module file is illegal Symbol entry of input file does not begin with file F3402 Message File file name has no string table for symbol Cause Symbol data of input object module file is illegal Action by user Per
175. er in this variable field is a hexadecimal which indicates the length of the field The numerical zero indicates that a character line consists of 16 characters The length of the character string is therefore 1 to 16 characters and the length of the variable length field including the character string length indicator is 2 to 17 15 6 1C 3 100 020202020202 T T T T T T T i ii ii iv v vi vii i Header character ii Block length 15H 21 iii Block type 6 iv Check sum 1CH Number of digits in load address vi Load address 100H vii Object code 6 bytes 2 Termination block The format for the termination block is shown in Table 7 7 Table 7 7 Termination Block Format for Extended Tech No of ASCII Field Characters Explanation Header 6 Standard header field Block type 8 Load address 2 17 Start address for program execution Number of characters is variable 08 8 1A 2 80 ii iv User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 209 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER i Header character ii Block length 8H iii Block type 8 iv Check sum 1AH v Number of digits in load address vi Load address 80H 3 Symbol block unused The extended Tech symbol block is data used for symbolic debugging It may be assumed to have the following characteristics Symbol 1 to 16 uppercase and lowercase alphabets numerals period
176. er of characters in the input range Action by user Keep the number of characters of the symbol to within the range and retry Button OK Close the message box 362 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 7 Error Messages Displayed by the Structured Assembler Preprocessor ST78K0 DLL Error Error Message Message symbol Multiple symbol definition Cause A symbol is described in duplicate for the symbol definition Action by user Delete the duplicate symbol and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message Can t set options to source file name Cause If a common option is reflected on an individual option specification of the individual option becomes illegal Action by user Check the specification of the individual option and retry Button OK Close the message box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 363 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 8 2 Assembler RA78KO Table 12 8 Error Messages Displayed by the Assembler RA78K0 DLL Error Error Message x Message Cannot find RA78K0 EXE shown in environmental variable PATH Cause The RA78K0 EXE execution format is not in the specified directory Action by user Re install the RA78K0 assembler package Button OK Close the message box Message Cannot find folder Will you create Cause The specified folder
177. erformed The range of values that can be specified for start is as follows OH lt start lt Largest address in program space other than SFR area Start can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers If a value outside the range or a value other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs If start is omitted 0 is assumed to be specified Size specifies the size of the address area for complement to be performed The range of values that can be specified for size is as follows 1H size Largest address in program space other than SFR area Size can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers If a value outside the range or a value other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs When start has been specified size cannot be omitted df neither a start address nor size is specified the object converter performs processing assuming that the range of the internal ROM is specified 228 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER If both the U and NU options are specified at the same time the one specified later takes precedence If the NO option is specified the U NU option is invalid Two or more address ranges cannot be specified by using the U option Specification formats for start and size in option U and their interpretation are as follows a U Complement value If the target device for assembly contains internal ROM the intern
178. ersion Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 275 276 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER Figure 9 1 I O Files of List Converter Assemble list files Object module files Load module files Parameter files ne List converter Absolute assemble list files Error list files User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 9 2 Functions of List Converter The following is a comparison of the advantages and disadvantages of relocatable assemblers with respect to absolute assemblers Advantages Relocatable assemblers can be developed by a team of several personnel Relocatable assemblers can be divided into modules for easy development and storage Relocatable assemblers support library management Relocatable assemblers are appropriate for development of large scale programs Disadvantages 1 2 3 The addresses in the assemble lists of relocatable assemblers do not agree with their actual physical addresses The values of external symbols become 0 in the assemble lists of relocatable assemblers To find out the actual values of external symbols a link map must be referred to Relocatable values in assemble lists are different from actual values The above disadvantages particularly reduce productivity in the areas of debugging and storage because of the considerable documentation they require The list converter offers a solution to these disadvantages of relocatable assembler packages
179. ertain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electro
180. ested Cause The F option has been specified inside a parameter file Action by user Do not specify the F option inside a parameter file F4020 Message Parameter file read error file name Cause The parameter file cannot be read Action by user Specify a correct parameter file F4021 Message Memory allocation failed Cause There is insufficient memory Action by user Secure the necessary memory 350 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 4 Object Converter Error Messages Error Number Error Message F4100 Message File name Illegal processor type Cause Target device of the assembler or compiler is different from the target device of this program Action by user Check whether the load module file is correct and check target device of the assemble or compile Also check whether the version of the device file is correct F4101 Message File name invalid input file or made by different hostmachine Cause Attempted to input a file other than a load module file or to convert a load module file created on an incompatible host machine F4103 Message Symbol symbol name Illegal attribute Cause A mistake exists in the symbol attribute of the input file F4104 Message File name Illegal input file not linked Cause Attempted to input an object module file F4105 Message Insufficient memory in hostmachine Cause Memo
181. eter file 00H Cannot be written Can be written However it is interpreted as the end of the character string 03H 06H 08H OEH 10H 15H 17H 18H 1BH 7FH Cannot be written Can be written However these will appear in the assemble list file as A single will not be output to the list 01H 02H 04H 05H 07H OBH OCH 11H 12H 13H 14H 16H 19H 1CH 1DH 1EH Can be written However these will appear in the assemble list file as Can be written However these will appear in the assemble list as 1AH Can be written However this will appear in the assemble list file as Cannot be written end of file Alphabetic characters Uppercase and lowercase characters are input as is Uppercase and lowercase characters are input as is Other Can be written Can be written Remark If an asterisk on the startup line is not a target for Wild Card expansion it can be written even if it is not enclosed in Notice control instruction with the same function as option LH can also be written at the beginning of the startup line A A TITLE A character string A ASATTA A character string A abbreviated form For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 123 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER
182. evice that is the target of structured assembler preprocessor Explanation Always specify the C option The structured assembler preprocessor performs preprocessing on the specified target device and generates the assembler source code Note that if the C option is omitted an error will occur f the device types specified by the C option and by the processor device type specification control instruction differ a warning is issued In this case the structured assembler preprocessor will prioritize the device type specified by the C option The device type specified by the C option is output to the secondary source file as a processor device type specification control instruction However this does not occur if a device type with the same name as a processor device type specification control instruction is specified Example of use The uD78054 is specified as the target device C gt st78k0 test s c054 Notice The C option cannot be omitted However if a processor device type specification control instruction PROCESSOR is written at the top of the source file specification in the command line can be omitted Refer to Notes on Use in the device file of each device for details concerning device types 74 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 2 Word symbol character specification Word symbol character specification SC Syntax SC character
183. f notices on using the RA78KO The instruction sets are not detailed in this manual For these instructions refer to the user s manual of the microcontroller for which software is being developed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 5 How to Read This Manual Those using an assembler for the first time are encouraged to read from CHAPTER 1 GENERAL of this manual Those who have a general understanding of assembler programs may skip this chapter Before using the RA78KO read CHAPTER 3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO After you have become familiar with the operation of each program you can proceed to utilize the lists in the APPENDIXES Caution In this manual it is assumed that a PC 9800 Series personal computer or an IBM PC AT compatible is used as the host machine differences in mind When the HP9000 Series 700 or SPARCstation family is used keep the following File name format is different Extension exe of an executable file is not suffixed with an EWS version such as the HP9000 Series 700 Extension bat of a batch file is rendered sh with an EWS version such as the HP9000 Series 700 The file names shown in uppercase are in lowercase with an EWS version such as the HP9000 Series 700 The execution examples and the environment set up indicated in this manual differ Conventions The following symbols and abbreviations are used throughout this manual lt gt E Note Caution Remark
184. fication conflicted file name Cause An I O file name has been specified in duplicate Action by user Specify different I O file names F2009 Message Unable to make file file name Cause The specified file is write protected Action by user Release the write protection on the specified file F2010 Message Directory not found file name Cause A non existent drive and or directory has been included in the output file name Action by user Specify an existent drive and or directory F2011 Message Illegal path option Cause Other than a path name has been specified in the option that specifies the path for the parameter Action by user Specify a correct path name F2012 Message Missing parameter option Cause A necessary parameter has not been specified Action by user Specify the parameter User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 329 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages 55 F2013 Message Parameter not needed option Cause An unnecessary parameter has been specified Action by user Delete the unnecessary parameter F2014 Message Out of range option Cause The specified numerical value is outside the range Action by user Specify a correct numerical value F2015 Message Parameter is too long option Cause The number of characters in the parameter exceeds the lim
185. file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the linker will not fit on the command line or when repeating the same linker option for two or more assembly operations To start up the linker from a parameter file specify the parameter file specification option F on the command line Start up the linker from a parameter file as follows X gt LK78KO A object module file A f parameter file name T il a b a Parameter file specification option b A file which includes the data required to start up the linker Remark An editor is used to create the parameter file The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option A option A A User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER If the object module file name is omitted from the command line specify the object module file name in the parameter file The object module file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all linker options and output file names that should be specified in the command line Example Create the parameter file kO plk using an editor lt Contents of the parameter file k0 plk gt parameter file kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 Imf pk0 map e tc tmp Use parameter file k0 plk to start up the linker C gt Ik78k0 fkO plk 6 5 2 Execution start and end messages 1 Execution start message When the linke
186. file or as a device type file However if the device type file name CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur When option E is specified and the output file name is omitted the error list file name will be input file name era When option E is specified and the drive name is omitted the error list file will be output to the current directory df both options E and NE are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Create an error list file KOmain era C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm ekOmain era 128 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Pass1 Start KOMAIN ASM 31 RA78KO error E2202 Illegal operand Pass Start KOMAIN ASM 26 RA78KO0 error E2312 Operand out of range byte KOMAIN ASM 31 RA78KO error E2202 Illegal operand Target chip uPD78054 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 2 error s and 0 warning s found This references the error list file kKOmain era Pass1 Start KOMAIN ASM 31 RA78KO0 error E2202 Illegal operand Pass Start KOMAIN ASM 26 RA78KO0 error E2312 Operand out of range byte KOMAIN ASM 31 RA78KO error E2202 Illegal operand Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 129 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 10 Parameter file specification Parameter
187. flash memory real address is supported in OC78KO V3 80 or later With the bank supported products codes are output in the Intel extended HEX format and flash memory real address by default but other output formats can also be selected by specifying the k option With a 64 KB or larger flash memory the code does not operate if it is output in the Intel standard format In this case be sure to specify the Intel extended format or the Motorola S type 24 bit standard address or 32 bit address for output User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B NOTES ON USE Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 2 2 main_c CSEG AT 100H 3 3 4 4 00100 13F301 MOV BANK BANKNUM lab bk1 5 5 00103 R9A0080 CALL lab bki 7 7 8 8 CSEG BANK 18000 0 000 9 9 18000 label_bk1 10 10 18000 00 NOP 11 11 18001 00 NOP 12 12 18002 00 NOP 13 13 18003 AF 14 14 15 15 16 16 In the above program lab bk1 is allocated to address 18000H Table B 1 Example of output in Intel extended HEX format flash memory real address 1000F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF10 020000020000FC 0601000013F3019A0080D8 020000020000FC 10010600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9 10011600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE9 10012600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD9 A0BFFOO0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF51 020000020000FC 04C00000000000AF8D 020000020000FC 10C00400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3C
188. form assemble or compile again This may be avoidable by making the recognizable number of characters 8 for the assembler and 7 for the compiler E3403 Message Symbol symbol name unmatched type in file file namet1 First defined in file file name2 Cause Externally defined referenced symbol type with same name is different in file 1 and file 2 E3404 Message Multiple Symbol definition symbol name in file file namet1 First defined in file file name2 Cause Public symbol defined in object module file 1 is already declared PUBLIC in object module file 2 E3405 Message Undefined symbol symbol name in file file name Cause Symbol declared EXTRN in the file is not declared PUBLIC in another file W3406 Message Stack area less than 10 bytes Cause Size of protected stack area is 10 bytes or less size of stack area protected in memory area specified with S option is 10 bytes or less W3407 Message Can t allocate stack area Cause No free area is available in memory area in which stack area is protected stack area cannot be protected in memory area specified with S option E3410 Message Multiple module name definition module name in file file 1 First defined in file file 2 Cause The module name of object module file 1 and the module name of object module file 2 are the same W3411 Message Different REL type in file name Cause The type version of object module file is different Action by user Re assemble or re compile
189. from a can only be specified file input from the command line Specification T path name Creates a temporary Independent Path specified of path for file in a specified by temporary path environmental file creation variable TMP Kanji code ZS Kanji described the If the ZS ZE ZN In Windows specification comment is options are specified atthe HP UX ZS interpreted as shift same time the one In SunOS JIS code specified later takes priority Solaris ZE ZE Kanji described in the comment is interpreted as EUC code ZN Characters described in the comment are not interpreted as kanji Device file Y path name Reads a device file Independent lt dev gt for the search path from the specified RA78KO startup specification path path Symbol D symbol Defines a symbol Independent None definition name specification value symbol name value two or more path names can be specified Series COMMON Specifies output of an Independent None common object module file object common to the 78K0 specification Series Self SELF Specify when using Independent None programming self programming specification Help Displays a help When option is specified No display specification message on the all other options are display unavailable User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 389 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS List of Linker Options Table C 3 List of L
190. g is displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN The librarian edits RA78KO object module files and library files in units of 1 module The librarian also outputs a list file If a librarian error occurs an error message is output to the display indicating the cause of the error 8 1 I O Files of Librarian The I O files of the librarian are as follows Table 8 1 1 Files of Librarian Type File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Subcommand files These files contain the execute program command the parameters These files are created by the user None Output files List files These files are the result of output of library data Ast I O files Object module files These are object module files output by the assembler compiler rel Library files These files input the library files output by the librarian and update the contents Temporary files These files automatically generated by the librarian when forming a library They are deleted when execution of the librarian is complete Lbxxxxxx y y 1 6 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 241 242 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Figure 8 1 I O Files of Librarian Object module files output by the compiler or assembler Subcommand Librarian gt Temporaryfiles Library files List files User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM
191. ge 7 Contents of parameter file 8 Input source module file name 9 Output object module file name 10 Assemble list file name Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 297 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 2 2 Assemble list The assemble list outputs the results of the assemble with error messages if errors occur Output format Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT 3M 4 SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 21 22 22 5 NAME SAMPM 28 28 29 29 6 0006 8 R220000 5 CALL CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX 30 30 5 output BC register lt ASCII code 31 31 6 0009 00000000 MOV DE 4STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 7 ERROR E2202 STNO 31 0 Illegal operand 6 000D 00 32 32 6 000E 8 0A27 5 MOV A B 33 33 6 0010 8 EB 5 MOV DE A Segment informations ADRS LEN NAME 9 FE20 10 0003H 11 DATA 9 0000 10 0002H 11 CODE 9 0000 10 0017H 11 CSEG Target chip 12 uPD78xxx Device file 13 Vx xx Assembly complete 14 1 error s and 15 0 warning s found 16 31 Explanation of output items 298 Table 10 5 Explanation of Assemble list Output Items Item Details 1 Line no of source module image 2 Line no including expansion of INCLUDE files and macros 3 Macro display M This is a macro definition line This is a macro expansion line n is the nest level Blank This is not a macro definition or expansion line
192. h path If option B is specified two or more times a library file will be input in a specified sequence Up to 10 B options may be specified Caution When specifying two or more libraries in the Linker Options dialog box in PM plus delimit them with commas For a detailed explanation of the method of creating library files refer to CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Example of use Input a library file kO lib KOsub rel is registered in the library file C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel bkO lib Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 181 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 11 Library file read path specification Library file read path specification 1 Syntax path name path name two or more path names can be specified Default assumption Path specified by environmental variable LIB78KO Current path if no path is specified Function Option I specifies input of a library file from a specified path Application Use option I to retrieve a library file from a certain path Explanation Option I is only available when a library file name is specified by option B without including a path name Two or more specifications of I are possible Two or more paths can be specified by separating them with A blank space cannot be inserted before or after the Up to 10 path names can be specified per link When two or more path names are specified the linker searches for library fi
193. han a path name has been specified in the option that specifies the path for the parameter Action by user Specify a correct path name User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 349 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 4 Object Converter Error Messages m Error Message F4012 Message Missing parameter option Cause A necessary parameter has not been specified Action by user Specify the parameter F4013 Message Parameter not needed option Cause An unnecessary parameter has been specified Action by user Delete the unnecessary parameter F4014 Message Out of range option Cause The specified numerical value is outside the range Action by user Specify a correct numerical value F4015 Message Parameter is too long option Cause The number of characters in the parameter exceeds the limit Action by user Specify a parameter whose character number is within the limit F4016 Message Illegal parameter option Cause The syntax of the parameter is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct parameter F4017 Message Too many parameters option Cause The total number of parameters exceeds the limit Action by user Specify parameters within the number limit F4018 Message Option is not recognized option Cause The option name is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct option name F4019 Message Parameter file n
194. he NLF option makes the option LF unavailable Application If you wish to add a page break after the contents of an assemble list file are printed specify option LF to add a form feed code Explanation If option NP is specified option LF is unavailable df both options LF and NLF are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Notice Acontrol instruction with the same function as option LF NLF can also be written at the beginning of a source module A A FORMFEED A A NOFORMFEED For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual Example of use Adda form feed code at the end of an assemble list file C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm pprn lf Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 127 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 9 Error list file output specification Error list file output specification E NE Syntax E output file name NE Default assumption NE Function Option E outputs an error list file and specifies the output destination and output file name of the error list file The option NE makes the option E unavailable Application Specify option E to save an error message into a file Specify option E to change the output destination and output file name of the error list file Explanation The error list file can be saved as a disk type
195. he be specified environmental variable INC78KO0 Assemble list P file name Specifies output of an If both options P and NP P input file file output assemble list file It are specified at the same name rel specification also specifies the time the option specified destination and file last takes precedence name of the output file NP Makes option P unavailable User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 387 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS Table C 2 Assembler Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Assemble list KA Outputs an assemble If KS and KX are KA file data list into an assemble specified at the same time specification list file KS is ignored If both options KA and Makes option NKA both options KS and unavailable NKS or both options KX KS Outputs an assemble 59 pube NKS list followed by a ii i a i k e symbol list into an assemble list file If options NKA NKS and NKS Makes option KS NKX are all specified unavailable option P is unavailable KX Outputs an assemble NKX list followed by a cross reference list into an assemble list file NKX Makes option KX unavailable Assemble list LW Changes the number If option NP is specified LW132 file format number of of characters that can option LW is unavailable sp
196. he CC78K0 For details refer to the document supplied with the C compiler package Notes on Use 8 Notes related to ID78K0 ID78K0 NS ID78K0 QB and SM78K0 When debugging is executed with the ID78K0 ID78K0 NS ID78K0 QB SM78KO0 keep the number of symbols and the number of source lines to within the limit of the ID78K0 ID78K0 NS ID78K0 QB and SM78KO0 For details refer to the document supplied with the debugger simulator Notes on Use 9 Notes on segment name When describing a segment name do not describe the same name as the primary name of the source file name Otherwise the abort error F2106 will occur as a result of assembly 10 Notes on description of macro definition in structured assembler source Use an assembly language instead of a structured assembly language to describe a macro definition in the source of the structured assembler preprocessor Otherwise a duplicated label definition error may occur 11 Notes on EQU definition of SFR name An SFR name may be specified as an operand of the EQU quasi directive If the name of an SFR outside the saddr area is specified as PUBLIC an assembly error occurs 12 Notes when using a network If a directory where a temporary file is to be created is on a file system that is shared on a network a file conflict may occur and an abnormal operation may be performed Avoid this conflict by using options and environmental variables User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 381 AP
197. he final character of the word symbol name specification Symbol definition specification D Specifies the symbol given to the IFDEF directive etc Tab number specification WT Specifies the output position of the converted instruction Include file read path l Reads from the path specified in an include file specification Secondary source file O Specifies the secondary source file name specification Error list file specification E Specifies the error list file name Parameter file specification F Specifies the parameter file name Debug data output specification GS Specifies the output of structured assembler source level debug data NGS Secondary source file forcible J Specifies the forcible output of the secondary source output specification file Kanji code 2 byte code ZS Specifies the kanji code type to be described in the specification 7E comment statement ZN Device file search path Y Specifies the path via which the device file will be specification searched Help specification Outputs the help message to the display 4 4 2 Explanation of structured assembler options The structured assembler options are described in detail on the following pages Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 73 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 1 Device type specification Device type specification C Syntax C device type Default assumption Cannot be omitted Function Specifies the d
198. he following order i Adev for the IK78k0 exe startup path ii Path by which LK78KO was started up ii Current directory iv The environmental variable PATH Function Reads a device file from the specified path Application Specify a path where a device file exists Explanation If anything other than a path name is specified after option Y an abort error occurs If the path name is omitted after option an abort error occurs The path from which the device file is read in the order determined as follows i Path specified by option Y ii Adev for the IK78k0 exe startup path iii Path by which LK78KO was started up iv Current directory v The environmental variable PATH Example of use Specify the path for the device file as directory c 78k0 dev C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel yc 78k0 dev 186 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 15 Warning message output specification Warning message output specification W Syntax W level Default assumption W1 Function Option W specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Application Specify the level at which a warning message will be output Explanation If anything other than a level is specified following the W option an abort error occurs Only levels 0 1 and 2 can be specified The foll
199. he map list outputs data on the location of segments Output format kkk Memory map 1 SPACE REGULAR MEMORY 2 ROM BASE ADDRESS 3 0000H OUTPUT INPUT SEGMENT SEGMENT 6 CODE 7 CODE 5 gap 6 CSEG 7 CSEG 7 CSEG 5 gap MEMORY RAM BASE ADDRESS 3 FEOOH OUTPUT INPUT SEGMENT SEGMENT 5 gap 6 DATA 7 DATA 5 5 gap Not Free Area Target chip 12 uPD78xxx Device File 13 Vx xx SIZE 4 2000H INPUT MODULE 8 SAMPM 8 SAMPM 8 SAMPS SIZE 4 0200H INPUT MODULE 8 SAMPM BASE ADDRESS 9 0000H 9 0000H 9 0002H 9 0080H 9 0080H 9 0095H 9 00B5H BASE ADDRESS 9 FEOOH 9 FE20H 9 FE20H 9 FE23H 9 FEOOH SIZE 10 0002H 11 CSEG AT 10 0002H 10 007EH 10 0035H 11 CSEG 10 0015H 10 0020H 10 1F4BH SIZE 10 0020H 10 0003H 11 DSEG AT 10 0003H 10 00DDH 10 0100H Explanation of output items Table 10 11 Explanation of Map List Output Items Item Details 1 Memory space name 2 Memory area name 3 Memory area start address 4 or 5 digits 4 Memory area size 4 or 5 digits 306 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST Table 10 11 Explanation of Map List Output Items Details Output group Displays gap for areas where nothing is located Segment
200. herefore an object module included in the library file cannot be linked F3106 Message Can t create temporary file file name Cause Cannot create temporary file E3107 Message Name name in directive already defined Cause Attempted to define a reserved word or a previously defined name as the memory area of a directive This name reserved word memory space name memory area name is already defined E3108 Message Overlapped memory area Memory area 1 and Memory area 2 Cause The memory area addresses defined in the memory directive are overlapped E3109 Message Memory area Memory area name too long name up to 31 characters Cause The memory area name specified in the directive is too long The memory area name specified in the directive is 32 characters or longer E3110 Message Memory area Memory area name already defined Cause The memory area specified in the memory directive is already registered E3111 Message Memory area Memory area name redefinition out of range Cause The range of the memory area specified in the memory directive is outside the redefinable range E3112 Message Segment segment name wrong allocation type Cause Wrong allocation type is specified for the segment in the merge directive 342 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages Error 55 C3113
201. ices that can be specified by option C refer to Considerations when using device files Notice Option C cannot be omitted However if a control instruction with the same function is described at the beginning of the source module command line specification can be omitted A A PROCESSOR A device type A A A PCA Adevice type A Abbreviated form For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual Example of use Specify option C on the command line as follows C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm 104 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 2 Object module file output specification Object module file output specification O NO Syntax O output file name NO Default assumption O input file name rel Function Option O specifies the output of an object module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Option NO makes option O J G and GA unavailable Application Use option O to specify the location to which an object module file is output or to change its file name Specify option NO when performing assembly only to output an assemble list file This will shorten assembly time Explanation The disk type file name device type file names NUL and AUX and the path name can be specified in output file name When the device type file n
202. ification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Device type C device Specifies the type of Independent Cannot be specification type the target device omitted Word symbol SC Specifies the final Independent SCP character character character of a word specification symbol name Symbol D symbol Specifies the symbol Independent None definition numerical given to the IFDEF specification value directive etc symbol name numerical value two or more path names can be specified Tab number WT Specifies the position Independent WT2 3 4 specification numerical of output of the value converted instruction numerical value numerical value Include file path name Specifies input of an Independent Path where the read path path name include file from a source file specification two or specified path exists more path Path specified names can by environment be specified variable INC78KO0 Secondary O file name Specifies the Independent O input file source file Secondary source name asm specification Error list file E file name Outputs the error list Independent E input file specification file name est User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 385 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS Table C 1 Structured Assembler Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Opt
203. ifies output of a link list file NP Link list file data specification KM Outputs a map list into a link list file NKM KD Outputs a link directive file into a link list file NKD KP Outputs a public symbol list into a link list file NKP KL Outputs a local symbol list into a link list file NKL Link list format specification LL Changes the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in a link list file LF Inserts a page feed code at the end of a list file NLF Error list file output specification E Outputs an error list file NE Library file specification B Inputs the specified file as a library file Library file read path Reads a library file from a specified path specification Parameter file specification F Inputs file names and options from a specified file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 159 160 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Table 6 5 Linker Options Classification Option Explanation Specification of path for T Creates a temporary file in a specified path temporary file creation Device file search path Reads a device file from a specified path specification Warning message output W Specifies whether or not to output a warning message specification to the console Link specification of boot area ZB Specifies the first address of the flash ROM area ROM program of flash ROM model On chip debug program size GO Specifies the on chip debug program size specification Security
204. ify the path for the device file as directory c 78k0 dev C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm c054 yc 78k0 dev 134 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 14 Symbol definition specification Symbol definition specification D Syntax D symbol name value symbol name value Default assumption None Function Option D defines symbols Application Specify option D when defining symbols Explanation The value given to a symbol is binary octal decimal or hexadecimal When value specification is omitted 1 will be specified Up to 30 symbols can be specified by using a comma as a delimiter Upto 31 characters be described for a symbol name When duplicate names are specified the latest one specified is valid Symbol names are case sensitive Symbols defined with D are used instead of EQU SET RESET If a symbol name specified for D was also defined in the source an error results Example of use When specifying 2 as the symbol definition C ra78k0 kOmain asm c054 ASYM 2 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 135 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 15 Series common object specification Series common object specification COMMON Syntax COMMON Default assumption The object file supporting the specified device is output Function COMMON option specifies output of an object module fi
205. ile module file file time the option specified type H1 to H15 output last takes precedence for extended specification NO No HEX format space object module file is output Symbol table S file name Outputs a symbol If both options S and NS S input file file output table file are specified at the same name sym file specification time the option specified type S1 to S15 NS Does not output a last takes precedence for extended symbol table file space Specification R Sorts HEX format If both options S and NS R of sort by objects in order of are specified at the same object address time the option specified address last takes precedence order NR Makes option R If option NO is specified unavailable option R becomes unavailable Object U Outputs a specified If U and NU are specified U0FFH complement complement complement value as at the same time the one specification value an object code for an specified later takes start size address area to precedence which no HEX format If option NO is specified NU object has been U becomes unavailable output Error list file E file name Outputs an error list If both options E and NE NE output file are specified at the same specification time the option specified NE Makes option E last takes precedence unavailable Parameter F file name Inputs options and Independent Options and file input file names from input file name
206. ile has been specified reads this file Option data save Opens the lt Save Option Data gt dialog box and saves the option file under the specified name 270 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 271 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 7 Method for Manipulating Library Files from PM p lus This section describes the method for manipulating library files from PM plus The lt Edit Option gt dialog box is described below 8 7 1 Method for manipulating Register the execution format for starting LB in standalone mode by selecting Register menu of PM plus Selecting the registered icon then opens the lt Library File Name gt dialog box Ex tool from the Tools After specifying the path and the file name press Next to display the lt Subcommand gt dialog box Figure 8 5 lt Library File Name gt Dialog Box Library File Name Library file name Specify the library file name to edit Browse Temporary director Specify the temporary directory for librarian This part can be omitted 272 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Figure 8 6 lt Subcommand gt Dialog Box Look in d Library file name 3255 DANECT ools32 BIN sample lib KOMAIN rel Module lis
207. iles will be read from the path determined in the following order i Adev for the Ib78kO0 exe startup path ii Path by which LB78KO was started up iii Current directory iv The environmental variable PATH Function Reads a device file from the specified path Application Specify a path where a device file exists Explanation If anything other than a path name is specified after option Y an abort error occurs If the path name is omitted after option an abort error occurs The path from which the device file is read in the order determined as follows i Path specified by option Y ii lt dev gt for the lb78k0 exe startup path iii Path by which LB78KO was started up iv Current directory v The environmental variable PATH Example of use Specify the path for the device file as directory c 78k0 dev C gt lb78k0 yc 78k0 dev 254 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 4 Help specification Help specification Syntax Default assumption No display Function Option displays a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the subcommands Refer to these when executing the librarian Explanation When option is specified all other options are unavailable Caution This option cannot be specified from PM plus To reference PM
208. iminates the need to specify options every time the assembler is started up Example of use PROCESSOR 054 Control instructions XREF Control instructions NAME SAMPM HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program gt ZA main routine FRI IIR e He He I He He I TOI I III II TOI I III I He e e IR ITOK IAI 11 5 2 Using PM plus The options of each program of the RA78K0 are automatically saved to the project file PRJ in PM plus The saved options will be used for subsequent builds MAKE It is not therefore necessary to specify the options each time User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 319 CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF RA78K0 11 5 3 Creating parameter files and subcommand files When executing any of the 78 5 programs structured assembler preprocessor assembler linker object converter and list converter if all the necessary data will not fit on the command line or if the same options are specified every time the program is executed create a parameter file Also subcommands can be registered in a subcommand file in the librarian This makes object module library formation easy Example of use 1 Create a parameter file and perform assembly Contents of parameter file KOmain pra gt parameter file kOmain asm osample rel g psample prn Enter the following on the command line C gt ra78k0 fkOmain pra Example of use 2 C
209. in extended tech format Block length 2 This is a 2 digit hexadecimal which indicates the number of characters in the block This number of characters does not include the start character and end of line Block type 1 6 Data block 3 Symbol block 8 Termination block Check sum 2 This is a 2 digit hexadecimal which indicates the remainder produced when the total value of the characters in the block except the start character the check sum and end of line is divided by 256 The total value of the characters is shown in Table 7 5 1 Data block Table 7 5 Character Values for Check Sum Evaluation Character Value Decimal 0 9 0 9 A Z 10 35 36 37 period 38 _ underscore 39 a z 40 65 The format for the data block is shown in Table 7 6 Table 7 6 Data Block Format for Extended Tech No of ASCII Field Characters Explanation Header 6 Standard header field Block type 6 208 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Table 7 6 Data Block Format for Extended Tech Field Explanation Load address 2 17 Address from which the object code is loaded Number of characters is variable Object code 2n Number of bytes n displayed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Caution In extended Tech the number of characters in a specific field is variable within 2 to 17 1 to 16 characters of actual data The first charact
210. ine lw Specify the number of characters on one line of the assemble list file in a range of 72 to 2046 Lines per page Specify the number of lines on one page of the assemble list file in a range of 20 to 32767 Expand TAB character It Specify the length of the tab character in a range of 0 to 8 List Header String Ih Specify the character string to be printed in the title column of the header of the assemble list file The number of characters that can be input is up to 60 Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Others gt gt Tab Include Search Path i Specify the path via which the include file is to be read by using the Edit button or directly inputting a path name Temporary Directory t Specify the path where a temporary file is to be created by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name Change Source Regulation Z This option selects the type of Kanji code SJIS zs EUC ze or No Multibyte zn to be used in the comment of the source Use Self Programming self Check this option to use the self programming function Use Command File Check this option to create a command file Symbol Definition d Input a numeric value to be defined as a symbol by using the Edit button or directly inputting a value Parameterfile f Specify the file to be input a
211. information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 109 110 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use Specify addition of assembler source debug data to an object module file C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm ga User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 5 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Include file read path specification Include file read path specification 1 Syntax I path name path name two or more path names can be specified Default assumption The include file is searched in the following sequence i Path where the source file exists ii Path specified by the environmental variable INC78KO Function Option I specifies input of an include file specified by include in a source module from a specified path Application Use option I to retrieve an include file from a certain path Explanation Two or more path names be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after the The include file specified by include is searched in the following sequence i If two or more path names are specified following the I option the include file is searched in the specified order ii If two or more I options are specified the include file is searched with the option specified later taking precedence iii After the path specified by the I option is
212. ing on the OS Windows HP UX ZS SunOS Solaris ZE Function Specifies the type of the kanji code to be described in the comment Explanation Specify the kanji code as follows ZS Interpreted as shift JIS code ZE Interpreted as EUC code ZN Not interpreted as kanji These options correspond to the kanji code specification control instructions as follows ZS KANJICODE SJIS ZE KANJICODE EUC ZN KANJI CODE NOTE The priority order of specifications of the kanji code is as follows i Specification of ZS ZE ZN option ii Specification of the kanji code specification control instruction SKANJICODE iii Specification of the environmental variable LANG78K iv Specification of default settings of each OS Example of use ltis specified that the kanji is interpreted as shift JIS code C gt st78k0 test s zs 84 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 12 Device file search path specification Device file search path specification Y Syntax Y drive directory Default assumption Default assumption The device file will be searched in the following order i dev for the path that activated st78k0 exe ii The path that started up st78k0 exe 1 The current path iv The path that was specified by the environment variable PATH Function Specifies the path via which a devi
213. ing processing For an explanation of the operation of subcommands refer to 8 5 Subcommands Procedure for creating a library file The general procedure for creating library files is as follows Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 243 244 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Figure 8 2 Procedure for Creating Library File START ie Galas CREATE subcommand gt Creation of library file gt Registration of object module file me SSS ADD subcommand Update or retrieval of object DELETE subcommand module file REPLACE subcommand pe ADD subcommand LIST subcommand PICK subcommand Output of library file data User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 3 Librarian Startup 8 3 1 Librarian startup The following two methods can be used to start up the librarian 1 Startup from the command line X path name lb78k0 A option cw 4 8 b d a Current drive name b Current directory name Librarian command file name Oo lt This contains detailed directions for the action of the librarian z Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Example C gt lb78k0 120 Iw80 Caution If more than one librarian option is specified separate the options with a space Fora detailed explanation of librarian options refer to 8 4 Librarian Options When the librarian is started up the fol
214. inker Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Load module O file name Outputs a load If both options O and NO O input file file output module file are specified at the same name Imf specification time the option specified NO Does not output a last takes precedence load module file Forced load J Forces output of a If both options J and NJ NJ module file load module file are specified at the same output time the option specified specification NY Makes option J last takes precedence unavailable Debug data G Outputs debugging If both options G and NG G output data to a load module are specified at the same specification file time the option specified last takes precedence NG Makes option G When option NG is unavailable specified the public symbol list and local symbol list cannot be output regardless of specification of KP or KL Generation S area Automatically If both options S and NS NS of stack name generates stack are specified at the same decision decision public time the option specified symbols symbols last takes precedence specification p NS Makes option S unavailable Directive file D file name Specifies a particular Independent specification file to be input as a directive file Link list file P file name Specifies output of a If both options P and NP P file output li
215. ion Specifies the file name of the parameter file Explanation Specify the input drive directory and file name of the parameter file file name cannot be omitted If the file type is omitted the type is assumed to be pst This option is effective when a large number of symbols are defined in the command line using option D Multiple specification of this option results in an error Parameter file nests are prohibited and their specification results in an error The characters following or in a parameter file are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF Example of use sample pst is specified as a parameter file C st78k0 fsample pst Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 81 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 9 Debug data output specification Debug data output specification GS NGS Syntax GS NGS Default assumption GS Function Specifies the output of structured assembler source level debug data Explanation GS option specifies the output of debug data to the secondary source file The NGS option disables the GS option setting If there is compiler debug data in the input source file the GS option replaces with at the top of the file If the GS and NGS options are both specified the option specified later is taken as valid Notice When debugging at the structure
216. ion df both options R and NR are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NO is specified option R NR becomes unavailable Example of use Sort HEX format objects in order of address C gt 0c78k0 kO Imf r User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 227 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 4 Object complement specification Object complement specification U NU Syntax U complement value start size NU Default assumption UOFFH filled with OFFH Function Option U outputs a specified complement value as an object code for an address area to which no HEX format object has been output Option NU makes option U unavailable Application Address areas to which no HEX format object has been output may become written with unnecessary code When such addresses are accessed by the program for any reason their action may be unpredictable By specifying option U code can be written in advance to address areas to which no HEX format object has been output Explanation The range of values that can be specified as complement values is as follows OH lt complement value lt OFFH Complement values can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers If a value outside the range or a value other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs Start specifies the start address area for complement to be p
217. ion and output file name of the error list file Explanation The file name of the error list file can be specified as a disk type file name or as a device type file name However if the device type file name CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur When option E is specified and the output file name is omitted the error list file name will be input file name eoc When option E is specified and the drive name is omitted the error list file will be output to the current drive df both options E and NE are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Create an error list file KO eoc C 0c78k0 k0 Imf ek0 eoc 230 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 6 Parameter file specification Parameter file specification F Syntax F file name Default assumption With no input file Function Option F specifies input of options and input file names from a specified file Application Specify option F when the data required to start up the object converter will not fit on the command line Specify option F to repeatedly specify the same options each time object conversion is performed and to save those options to a parameter file Explanation Only a disk type file name can be specified as file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will occur If the file name is om
218. ions When Omitted Parameter F file name Inputs the input file Independent Options and file name and option input file names specification from the specified can only be file input from the command line Debug data GS Specifies the output If the options GS and NGS GS output of structured are both specified the one specification assembler source specified later is valid level debug data NGS Invalidates the option GS Secondary J Forcibly outputs the Independent No forcible source file secondary source output forcible file output specification Kanji code ZS Kanji described in the If the ZS ZE and ZN In Windows 2 byte code comment is options are specified at the HP UX ZS specification interpreted as shift same time the one In SunOS JIS code specified later takes priority Solaris ZE ZE Kanji described in the comment is interpreted as EUC code ZN Characters described in the comment are not interpreted as kanji Device file Y path name Reads the device file Independent lt dev gt for the search path form the specified path that specification path activated the ST78KO Help ES Outputs the help Invalidates all other options Not displayed specification message to the display 386 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS C 2 Assembler Options Table C 2 Assembler Options Interpretation Classification Format F
219. isplay Function Option displays a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the object converter options Refer to these when executing the object converter Explanation When option is specified all other options are unavailable Caution This option cannot be specified from PM plus To reference PM plus help click the Help button in the lt Object Converter Options gt dialog box Example of use When option is specified a help message is output on the display C gt 0c78k0 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx usage oc78k0 option input file option The option is as follows means omissible ffile Input option or input file name from specified file o file no Create HEX module file with specified name Not s file ns Create symbol table file with specified name Not r nr Sort HEX object by address Not uvalue start size nu Fill up HEX object with specified value Not kkind Select hex format l intel format IE intel extend format tex format M S format ME s 32bit format ydirectory Set device file search path zf Create boot hex module file HXB and flash hex module file HXF Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o s r uOffh 236
220. ist file output specification O Syntax O output file name Default assumption O assemble list file name p Function Option O specifies the output of an absolute assemble list file Option O also specifies the output destination and output file name Application Use option O to change the output destination and output file name of the absolute assemble list file Explanation file name can be specified as a disk type file name or as a device type file name However only CON PRN NUL and AUX can be specified as device type file names If CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur If the same device is specified for the file name as for the error file an abort error will occur If the output file name is omitted when option O is specified the absolute assemble list file name will become assemble list file name p If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will assign the file type p and output the file If the drive name is omitted when option O is specified the absolute assemble list file will be output to the current drive Example of use Create an absolute assemble list file sample p C gt Icnv78k0 kOmain prn osample p IkO Imf 286 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 4 Error list file output specification Error list file output specification E NE Syntax
221. it Action by user Specify a parameter whose character number is within the limit F2016 Message Illegal parameter option Cause The syntax of the parameter is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct parameter F2017 Message Too many parameters option Cause The total number of parameters exceeds the limit Action by user Specify parameters within the number limit F2018 Message Option is not recognized option Cause The option name is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct option name F2019 Message Parameter file nested Cause The F option has been specified inside a parameter file Action by user Do not specify the F option inside a parameter file F2020 Message Parameter file read error file name Cause The parameter file cannot be read Action by user Specify a correct parameter file F2021 Message Memory allocation failed Cause There is insufficient memory Action by user Secure the necessary memory F2101 Message Source file size O file name Cause A source module with file size 0 has been input F2102 Message Illegal processor type specified Cause A mistake was made in the specification of the target device F2103 Message Syntax error in module header Cause A mistake was made in format for a control instruction that can be written in a source module header 330 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages
222. it range is specified as the flash start address Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button OK Close the message box Message Cannot find path or file Make sure path or filename Cause The specified path or file cannot be found Action by user Specify a correct path or file name Button Ok Close the message box Message Cannot find folder Will you create Cause The specified folder does not exist Action by user Create a folder or select another folder Button Ok Creates a folder and close the message box Cancel Close the message box Message Not make folder Cause The specified folder cannot be created Action by user Specify another folder Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of Size for On Chip Debug is from 256 to 1024 Cause The size specified for on chip debugging is outside the input limit range Action by user Specify a value within the limit range and retry Button OK Close the message box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 367 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 9 Error Messages Displayed by the Linker LK78K0 DLL Error Type Error Message Message Too many figures for Security ID Up to 20 can be specified for Security ID Cause The specification format of the specified Security ID is incorrect Action by user
223. itional assembly nesting levels 8 levels Number of include file paths specifiable by I option 64 Number of symbols definable by D option 30 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Notes 1 Excluding the number of module names and section names Memory is used If there is no memory a file is used Notes 2 Information to be passed to the linker if the symbol value cannot be resolved by the assembler For example if an externally referenced symbol is to be referenced by the MOV instruction two pieces of relocation information are generated in a rel file Notes 3 Including CR and LF codes If more than 2048 characters are written on one line a warning message is output and the 2049th character and those that follow are ignored Notes 4 The switch name is set as true false by the SET RESET quasi directive and is used by IF etc Notes 5 If the maximum number of characters that can be specified in one line of the assemble list file X is 119 this figure will be X 60 or less 3 Maximum performance of linker Table 1 3 Maximum Performance of Linker Item Maximum Performance Number of symbols local public 65535 Line number information of the same segment 65535 Number of segments 65535 Input modules 1024 Character length of memory area name 31 characters Note Including those defined by default User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Number of memory areas 100Note
224. its value and public symbol OSTBEG which holds the last address 1 as its value These symbols are handled as publicly declared NUMBER attribute symbols and are registered at the end of the linker s symbol table When these symbols are output to a link list file the module name column is left blank If the largest open area is 10 bytes or smaller a warning message is output f no free area exists a warning message is output and both OSTEND and _ STBEG hold the last address 1 as their values If area is omitted RAM is specified df both options S and NS are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 165 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Example of use Reserve the stack area in memory area RAM however the linker will assume that a segment of size 310H in RAM and a segment of size D8H located in the saddr area are input C gt k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel s FEFFH FEF8H 8H free FEF7H Segment size D8H FE20H This portion FE10H to FE1FH 10H free is the largest free area The Memory FE10H following stack symbols are area RAM generated _ STEND FE10H _ STBEG FE20H FEOFH Segment size 310H FBOOH 166 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 5 Directive file specification Directive file specification D Syntax D file name Default assumption None Function
225. itted an abort error will occur Nesting of parameter files is not permitted If option F is specified within a parameter file an abort error will occur The number of characters that can be written within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or a line feed code LF Options and input file names written in a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last will take precedence All characters entered after or and before a line feed code LF or EOF will be interpreted as comments If option F is specified two or more times an abort error will occur Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 231 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Example of use Perform object conversion using a parameter file lt Set the contents of parameter file 78k0 poc as follows gt parameter file k0 Imf osample hex ssample sym r Enter the following on the command line C gt 0c78k0 k0 Imf f78k0 poc 232 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 HEX format specification HEX format specification Syntax KI KIE KT KM KME Default assumption KIE Function Specifies format of a HEX format object module file to be output Application Use these options to specify the format of a HEX forma
226. k k KEKE KK k k k k he he HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program n sub routine i AM input condition HL hex 2 code 1 X output condition BC register lt ASCII 2 code k k e KI e k k 1 k k k K IK I IE He e ICI KK II PUBLIC CONVAH CSEG CONVAH XOR A A ROL4 HL hex upper code load CALL SASC MOV B A store result MOV A A ROL4 HL hex lower code load CALL SASC MOV store result RET k k e He k k 1k k k I k k e Kk k k k e e He e e I IOI I He e He He e ke He e e ITI He e e He e e ke e e ITI II IIR IAI ke ke k ke subroutine convert ASCII code input Acc lower 4016 lt hex code output Acc lt ASCII code SASC CMP 0AH check hex code gt 9 BC SASC1 ADD A 07H bias 7 SASC1 ADD A 30H bias 30 RET END Remarks 1 This sample program is a reference program prepared for the purpose of teaching you about the functions and operation of the RA78KO It cannot be used as an application program 48 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 Remarks 2 This sample program does not operate the default settings of the register bank selection flags RBSO RBS1 The settings for these items are therefore as follows Register bank 0 FEF8H to FE
227. kes the option LF unavailable Application f you wish to add a page break after the contents of a link list file are printed specify option LF to add a form feed code Explanation If option NP is specified option LF is unavailable If both options LF and NLF are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Adda form feed code at the end of a link list file C gt lk78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0 map lf Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 179 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 9 Error list file output specification Error list file output specification E NE Syntax E file name NE Default assumption NE Function Specify option E to specify the output destination and file name of an error list file Option NE makes option E unavailable Application Specify option E to change the output destination and output file name of the error list file Explanation The file name of the error list file can be specified as a disk type file name or as a device type file name However if the device type file name CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur When option E is specified and the output file name is omitted the error list file name will be input file name elk When option E is specified and the drive name is omitted the error list file will be output to the current drive df both options E and NE ar
228. l Table File s Check this option to output a symbol table file Output File Name Specify the path and file name of a symbol table file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Create Error List File e Check this option to output an error list file Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 239 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER lt lt Others gt gt Tab 240 Use Command File Check this option to create a command file Parameterfile f Specify the file to be input as a user defined parameter file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a file name Other options To specify an option other than those that can be set in this dialog box enter the option in the input box Caution The help specification option cannot be specified on PM plus Reset Resets the input contents Option data read Opens the lt Read Option Data gt dialog box and after the option data file has been specified reads this file Option data save Opens the lt Save Option Data gt dialog box and save the option data to the option data file with a name Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character strin
229. l character Cause A character that cannot be used as a symbol is specified Action by user Specify a usable character Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many Include Search Path Up to 64 can be specified for Include Search Path Cause Too many include file paths are specified Action by user Specify the number of include file paths in the usable range Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many characters for Include Search Path Cause The length of the include file path is specified as a number of characters exceeding the input range Action by user Specify a number of characters in the input range Button Ok Close the message box Message Include file path Multiple Include Search Path definition Cause Include file paths are described in duplicate Action by user Delete the duplicate path s and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message Too many symbols for Symbol Definition Up to 30 symbols can be specified Cause A number of symbols exceeding the input range is described for the symbol definition Action by user Keep the number of symbols to within the usable range and retry Button Ok Close the message box Message symbol Too many characters for Symbol Definition Up to 31 characters can be described for symbol name Cause The length of the defined symbol is greater than the numb
230. le Name Type Object module type rel Load module file Imf Use an option when specifying a file which is different in the primary name 2 Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the list converter will not fit on the command line or when the same list converter option is specified repeatedly each time list conversion is performed To start up the list converter from a parameter file specify the specify parameter file option F on the 280 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER command line Start up the list converter from a parameter file as follows C gt Icnv78k0 A input file name A f parameter file name T T a b a Specify a parameter file option b Afile which includes the data required to start up the list converter Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption A A If the input file name is omitted from the command line only 1 input file name can be specified in the parameter file The input file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all list converter options and output file names that should be specified in the command line Example Create the parameter file kO plv using an editor lt Contents of gt parameter file kOmain IKO Imf
231. le common to the 78K0 Series Application This option generates an object code that can be used commonly in the 78K0 Series regardless of the device type specification C option The output object module file can be linked with an object file for which a different device in the 78KO Series is specified Explanation Specify this option to generate an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO Series Notice Even when the COMMON option is specified the device type specification C option or control instruction of the same function must not be omitted If the series common object specification COMMON option is specified for all the input object module files to be linked an error occurs Example of use C gt ra78k0 kOsub c c054 common 136 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 16 Self programming specification Self programming specification SELF Syntax SELF Default assumption None Function The SELF option stops an error occurring when CALL 8100H is described even if address 8100H is outside the access range i e there is no internal ROM Application Specify the SELF option when using self programming Explanation Specify this option if an error occurs when CALL 8100H is described during self programming Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 137 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 17 Help specification Help specification
232. lected by setting a switch for conditional assembly When the debug statement is no longer required the source program can be assembled without major modifications to the program User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION This chapter explains the procedure used to install the files stored in the supply media of the RA78KO in the user development environment host machine and the procedure to uninstall these files from the user development environment 2 1 Host Machine and Supply Medium The assembler package supports the development environments shown in Table 2 1 The supply medium differs depending on the host machine Table 2 1 Supply Medium of Assembler Package Host Machine OS Supply Medium IBM PC AT compatible Japanese Windows 98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 Note CD ROM English Windows 98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 Nete HP9000 Series 700 HP UXTM Rel 10 10 or later CD ROM SPARCstation Series SunOs Rel 4 1 4 or later Solaris M Rel 2 5 1 or later Note To use the assembler in Windows PM plus is necessary If PM plus is not used each tool included in the RA78K0 assembler package can be used from the DOS prompt Windows 98 Me or command prompt Windows 2000 XP NT 4 0 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 37 CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION 2 2 Installation The procedure for installing to the host machine the files provided in the 78 5 supply media is de
233. les These are binary image files of the object Imf codes output as a result of linking These files are output by the linker Parameter files These files contain the parameters for the poc executed programs These files are created by the user Output files HEX format object These are files created by converting load hex module files module files into hexadecimal object format These files are used during mask ROM development and PROM program use Symbol table files These files contain the symbol data included sym in each module of an input file Error list files These files contain error data from the object eoc conversion Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 201 202 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Figure 7 1 I O Files of Object Converter Load module file Parameter file gt Object converter Symbol table file HEX format object module file Error list file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 2 Functions of Object Converter 7 2 1 How the object converter handles extended space When a code is output to segments located in extended memory space the object converter generates a separate HEX format object module file for each space To output a separate HEX file to each space specify the space for both memory and merge directives in the link directive file For the link directive refer to 6 4 1 Directive files The object converter a
234. les in the specified order Even if no library file exists in the specified path an error will not result If the path name is omitted an abort error occurs Ifa library file is specified by option B without including a path name the linker will search paths in the following sequence i Path specified by option I ii Path specified by environmental variable LIB78KO iii The current path If a library file with the specified name is not found in any of these paths an error will occur Example of use Search for a library file file from path c libB C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel bkO lib ic lib 182 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 12 Parameter file specification Parameter file specification F Syntax F file name Default assumption With no input file Function Option F specifies input of linker options and the input file name from a specified file Application Specify option F when the data required to start up the linker will not fit on the command line When you wish to repeatedly specify the same options each time assembly is performed specify those options in a parameter file and specify option F Explanation Only a disk type file name can be specified as file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will occur If the file name is omitted an abort error will occur Nesting of parameter files is
235. lowing startup message appears on the display 78K 0 Series Librarian Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx After an asterisk specify a librarian subcommand create kO lib add kO lib kOmain rel kOsub rel exit When input of subcommands is finished processing of each subcommand begins When processing of one subcommand is complete appears again on the screen and the librarian waits for the next subcommand to be entered The librarian repeats this operation until the EXIT subcommand is entered Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 245 246 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Specify subcommand Subcommand processing Specify subcommand Subcommand processing Specify EXIT subcommand Exit librarian Up to 128 characters can be specified in 1 line If all the required operand data will not fit on 1 line use amp to continue specification on the next line Specification can be continued up to 15 lines Startup from a subcommand file A subcommand file is a file in which librarian subcommands are stored If a subcommand file is not specified when the librarian is started up multiple subcommands must be specified after the appears By creating a subcommand file these multiple subcommand files can all be processed at once A subcommand file can also be used when the same subcommand is specified repeatedly each time library formatio
236. lp message on H the display EXIT EXIT Exits the librarian E User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 397 APPENDIX E INDEX Symbols F LB78K0 255 F LONV78KO 288 LCNV78KO 290 F LK78KO0 183 LK78KO 192 F OC78K0 231 OC78K0 236 F RA78K0 130 RA78K0 138 F ST78K0 81 ST78K0 86 Fatal error 322 A G Abort error 322 G LK78K0 164 Absolute assemble list 277 318 G 78 107 ADD 259 GA RA78KO0 109 asm 67 93 GI LK78K0 190 Assemble list 277 298 318 GO 1 78 0 189 Assembler 17 27 GS ST78K0 82 150 H B HELP 266 B LK78K0 181 hex 201 C C 78 104 1 1 78 0 182 C ST78K0 74 I 78 111 COMMON RA78K0 136 1 5 78 78 COMPLETE 150 INC78K0 316 CREATE 258 Installation 38 Cross reference list 301 Intel standard HEX format 205 Internal error 322 D 167 J D RA78K0 ae J LK78KO 163 D ST78K0 J 78 106 DELETE 260 J ST78K0 83 dr LK78K0 146 K E 78 113 E LONV78KO 287 Kanji code 45 E LK78KO0 180 KD LK78K0 171 E OC78KO 230 KI OC78KO 233 E 78 128 KIE 78 0 233 E ST78KO0 80 KL LK78K0 175
237. lso generates a symbol table file for each space in extended space when symbols having ADDRESS or BIT attributes are defined for segments located in extended space All symbols having NUMBER attributes are output to symbol table file generated for normal space Table 7 2 shows the file types of the HEX format object module files and symbol table files generated for extended space Table 7 2 Output File Types for Extended Space Normal Spac Extended Space File REGULAR EX1 EX2 EX3 4 i EX13 EX14 EX15 HEX hex H1 H2 H3 H4 H13 H14 H15 Symbol sym 81 52 53 54 S13 S14 S15 7 2 2 Flash ROM self rewriting mode support The object converter can create separate HEX object module files in the boot area and flash area for the code located in the flash ROM when the self rewriting mode of the flash ROM is used To output separate HEX files specify object converter option ZF The file type is as follows Table 7 3 File Type When ZF Option Is Specified File File Type Output file at boot area ROM program side hxb Output file at program side other than boot area ROM hxf User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 203 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 23 HEX format object module files The HEX format object module file output by the object converter can be input to a HEX loader such as a PROM programmer or a debugger The following is a HEX format object module file of
238. m consisting of a Program consisting of two or single modules more modules Bugs are found Module Module Entire program Only this module must be XXX must be assembled Module assembled again again Module 2 Utilization of resources Highly reliable highly versatile modules which have been previously created can be utilized for creation of another program If you accumulate such high versatility modules as software resources you can save time and labor in developing a new program Figure 1 7 Program Development Using Existing Module Module A Module B Module C Module D New module Module A New module Module D lt New program User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 23 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Overview of Features of RA78K0 The procedure for developing general programs appears in Figure 1 8 Program development essentially flows from the assembler to the linker to the object converter The assembler linker object converter and other programs are generically referred to as the RA78KO the assembler program is referred to as the assembler Figure 1 8 Procedure for Program Development Using RA78K0 C source module file Include file C compiler Startup module file for lt Assembler E module file the C compiler Object module file Structured assembler module file Stru
239. mat KIE Intel extended HEX format KT Extended Tech format KM Motorola S type format 24 bit standard address KME Motorola S type format 32 bit address Device file search path Y Reads a device file from a specified path specification ZF Adds an option that outputs the boot area and other File separate output specification for flash ROM model areas to separate HEX format files when linking of the boot area ROM program of a flash ROM model is specified Ifthe ZF option is specified the output file type at the boot area ROM program side is HXB and the output file type at the side of the other programs is HXF Help specification Displays a help message on the display User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 221 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 4 2 Explanation of object converter options This section contains detailed explanations of each object converter option 222 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 1 HEX format object module file output specification HEX format object module file output specification O NO Syntax O output file name NO Default assumption O input file name HEX The file type for extended space is H1 to H15 Function Option O specifies the output of a HEX format object module file Option O also specifies the output destination and output file name Option NO specifies that no HEX format object mod
240. mbol name numerical value symbol name numerical value Function Defines the symbol Explanation The numerical value given to a symbol can be binary octal decimal or hexadecimal If the numerical value specification is omitted the value becomes 1 Defining a symbol using this option is identical to defining a symbol using the define directive Up to 30 items can be defined in the command line by using commas as delimiters Up to 31 characters can be described for a symbol name This option is usually used in combination with the idef directive If more than one specification is made the item specified last is valid If this option is specified together with the define directive a warning message is output and the define directive is taken as valid Alphabet letters are not case sensitive Example of use 76 The symbol TRUE is defined as 1 C gt st78k0 test s dTRUE 1 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 Tab number specification Tab number specification WT Syntax WT numerical value 1 WT numerical value 1 numerical value 2 WT numerical value 1 numerical value 2 numerical value 3 Default assumption WT2 3 4 Function Specifies the number of tabs of the converted assembly language Explanation The WT option allows the output position of the assembler source ins
241. module file specification P NO Forced object module file output J Forces output of an object module file specification 4 NJ Debug data output specification G Outputs debugging data local symbol data to an object module file NG GA Outputs assembler source debugging data to an object module file NGA Include file read path l Reads from the path specified in an include file specification Assemble list file output P Specifies output of an assemble list file specification P NP Assemble list file data KA Outputs an assemble list into an assemble list file cification ian NKA KS Outputs a symbol list into an assemble list file NKS KX Outputs a cross reference list into an assemble list file NKX Assemble list file format LW Changes the number of characters that can be specification printed in 1 line in an assemble list file LL Changes the number of lines that can be printed in 1 page in an assemble list file LH Outputs the character string specified in the header of an assemble list file LT Changes the number of spaces in a tab LF Inserts a line feed code at the end of an assemble list file NLF Error list file output specification E Outputs an error list file NE 100 User s Manual U17199EJ1 VOUM Assembler options are CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Table 5 2 Assembler Options Classification Option Explanation Parameter file specification F Inputs the input file name
242. mory area in the specified memory space Memory area name No specification Specified memory area in the REGULAR space Memory area name Memory space name Specified memory area in the specified memory space 154 This table focuses on defining the memory area to which the segment is located When the actual location address is determined if AT start address is specified the segment is allocated to a location beginning at that address For example if the memory space name EX1 is specified for a segment with the relocation characteristic CSEG FIXED the segment will be located to fit within 800H to FFFH User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER Notice The location address of an input segment for which no segment location directive is specified will be determined according to the relocation characteristics specified by a segment definition directive during assembly Ifno segment exists for which a segment name has been specified an error will occur If more than one segment location directive is specified for the same segment an error will occur Example of Use Allocate an address for a segment SEG1 which has the segment type and relocation characteristic CSEG UNIT In this example the declared memory area is as follows MEMORY ROM 0000H 1000H MEMORY MEM 1000H 2000H MEMORY RAM OFEOOH 200H When input segment SEG is alloca
243. mplete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects an object conversion errors resulting from the object conversion the object converter outputs the error number to the display and returns control to the operating system Target chip uPD780xxx Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 219 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER If the object converter detects a fatal error during object conversion which makes it unable to continue link processing the object converter outputs a message to the display cancels object conversion and returns control to the operating system Example 1 A non existent load module file name is specified C 0c78k0 sample Imf 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx xx xxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx RA78KO error F4006 File not found SAMPLE LMF Program aborted In the above example a non existent load module file is specified An error results and the object converter aborts the object conversion Example 2 A non existent object converter option is specified C gt 0c78k0 kO0 Imf a 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx xx xxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx RA78KO error F4018 Option is not recognized a Please enter OC78KO if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example
244. mporary file in a specified path Application Use option T to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Explanation Only apath can be specified as a path name The path name cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file being created will be written to disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when library formation is finished They are also deleted when library formation is aborted by pressing CTRL C The path in which the temporary file is to be created is determined according to the following order i The path specified by option T ii The path specified by environmental variable TMP when option T is omitted ii The current path when TMP is not set When i or ii is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use Specify output of a temporary file to directory c tmp C gt lb78k0 tc tmp User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 253 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 3 Device file search path specification Device file search path specification Y Syntax path name Default assumption Device f
245. mporary files LANG78K Kanji 2 byte character type specification Example of use lt Contents of autoexec bat gt AUTOEXEC BAT Verify on break on PATH c bin c bat c ra78k0 lt 1 SET 1 78 c ra78kO include lt 2 SET LIB78KO0 c ra78kO lib lt 3 SET TMP c tmp lt 4 SET LANG78K SJIS lt 5 316 1 Because this path is specified execution format files are retrieved from directories in the order c bin c ra78k0 2 The assembler retrieves include files from the directory c ra78kO include 3 The linker retrieves library files from c ra78kO lib 4 Each program creates a temporary file in c tmp 5 Kanji in the comment statement is interpreted as shift JIS code Caution If the assembler package has been installed using the Windows installer the necessary environmental variables are automatically set User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF RA78K0 11 3 Interrupting Program Execution Execution of each program can be interrupted by entering CTRL C from the keyboard If break on is specified during execution of a batch file control is returned to the operating system regardless of the timing of the key input When break off is specified control is only returned to the operating system during screen display In this case all open temporary files and output files are deleted Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 317 CHAP
246. mum Performance of Assembler Item Maximum Performance Number of symbols local public 65535 Number of symbols that can be output to cross 65534Notet reference list Maximum marco body size referenced by one marco 1 MB Total size of all macro bodies 10 MB Number of segments in 1 file 256 Macros and include specifications in 1 file 10000 Macros and include specifications in 1 include file 10000 Relocation information e e 65535 Line number information 65535 BR quasi directives in 1 file 32767 Numbers of characters on 1 line of source code 2048Note3 Symbol length 256 characters Number of switch name definitiongNote4 1000 Character length of switch 31 characters Character length of segment name 8 characters Character length of module name NAME quasi directive 8 characters Number of virtual parameters in MACRO quasi directive 16 Number of actual parameters in macro reference 16 Number of actual parameters in IRP quasi directive 16 Number of local symbols in macro body 64 Total number of local symbols in expanded macro 65535 Nesting levels in macro macro reference REPT quasi 8 levels directive IRP quasi directive Number of characters specifiable by TITLE control eoNote5 instruction LH option Number of characters specifiable by SUBTITLE control 72 instruction Include file nesting levels in 1 file 8 levels Cond
247. n Cause The same conversion pattern has been defined a second time Action by user Correct the 4DEFCALLT registration E1208 Message Symbol table overflow Cause The number of symbols exceeds the limit Action by user Reduce the number of symbols E1209 Message Syntax error Cause The syntax of the written statement is incorrect Action by user Use correct syntax E1210 Message Nest level error Cause There is an error in the nesting overflow nesting level etc Action by user Use a correct control statement 326 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages u n Error Message E1211 Message Too many characters in a line Cause The length of one line has been exceeded Action by user Specify 2046 or fewer characters on one line E1212 Message Too many include files Cause There is an include quasi directive in the include file Action by user Do not specify an include quasi directive in the include file E1214 Message Illegal BREAK Cause A BREAK statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the BREAK statement in the correct place E1215 Message Illegal CONTINUE Cause A CONTINUE statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the CONTINUE statement in the correct place E1216 Message Illegal CASE DEFAULT ENDS Cause
248. n a relocatable assembler the addresses determined for the machine language instructions assembled from the assembly language are tentative Absolute addresses are determined subsequently by the linker In the past when a program was created with an absolute assembler programmers had to as a rule complete programming at the same time However if all the components of a large program are created as a single entity the program becomes complicated making analysis and maintenance of the program difficult To avoid this such large programs are developed by dividing them into several subprograms called modules for each functional unit This programming technique is called modular programming 1 1 4 Advantages of a relocatable assembler A relocatable assembler is an assembler suitable for modular programming which has the following advantages 1 Increase in development efficiency It is difficult to write a large program all at the same time In such cases dividing the program into modules for each function enables two or more programmers to develop subprograms in parallel to increase development efficiency Furthermore if any bugs are found in the program it is not necessary to assemble the entire program just to correct one part of the program and only a module which must be corrected can be reassembled This shortens debugging time 22 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Figure 1 6 Reassembly for Debugging Progra
249. n input file has not been specified Action by user Specify an input file F4002 Message Too many input files Cause Two or more input files have been specified Action by user Specify only one input file F4004 Message Illegal file name file name Cause Either there are illegal characters in the file name or the number of characters exceeds the limit Action by user Input a file name that has legal characters and is within the character number limit F4005 Message Illegal file specification file name Cause An illegal file has been specified Action by user Specify a legal file F4006 Message File not found file name Cause The specified input file does not exist Action by user The file is output as startup routine name Imf if the startup routine of the C compiler is linked In this case specify an output file name with a linker option like o Imf F4008 Message File specification conflicted file name Cause An I O file name has been specified in duplicate Action by user Specify different I O file names F4009 Message Unable to make file file name Cause The specified file is write protected Action by user Release the write protection on the specified file F4010 Message Directory not found file name Cause A non existent drive and or directory has been included in the output file name Action by user Specify an existent drive and or directory F4011 Message Illegal path option Cause Other t
250. n is performed When using a subcommand file describe before the file name Start up the librarian from a subcommand file as follows X gt lb78k0 A lt subcommand file name A option 4 0 i i Be sure to add this when specifying a subcommand file ii File in which subcommands are stored a Use an editor to create the subcommand file b The rules for writing the content of a subcommand file are as follows Subcommand name operand data Subcommand name operand data EXIT c When repeating one subcommand describe amp at the end of each line to indicate continuation d Everything described from a semicolon to the end of the line will be assumed to be a comment and will not be interpreted by the librarian command User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN e If the last subcommand in a subcommand file is not the EXIT subcommand the librarian will automatically interpret an EXIT subcommand f The librarian reads subcommands from the subcommand file and processes them The librarian quits after it completes processing of all subcommands in the subcommand file Example Create the subcommand file kO slb using an editor lt Contents of k0 slb gt library creation command create kO lib add k0 lib kOmain rel amp kOsub rel exit Use subcommand file kO slb to start up the librarian C gt lb78k0 lt k0 slb Users Manual
251. ncorrect E3204 Message Memory area space name not defined Cause Memory area space name specified in merge directive is not defined E3205 Message Name name in directive has bad attribute Cause An item that cannot be described in a segment name memory area name or memory space name is described in the directive for example a memory space name is described where a memory area name is required E3206 Message Segment segment name can t allocate to memory ignored Cause Segment cannot be allocated to memory not enough memory area exists to allocate segment E3207 Message Segment segment name has illegal segment type Cause This segment type data is illegal User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 343 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages Error Number Error Message E3208 Message Segment segment name may not change attribute Cause Attempted to change the link type in the directive for a segment created with the reallocation attribute AT xxxxH specified during assemble or created using the ORG directive E3209 Message Segment segment name may not change arrangement Cause Attempted to change the allocation address in the directive for a segment created with the reallocation attribute AT xxxxxxH specified during assemble or created using the ORG directive Action by user Do not specify the allocation address in the ass
252. nd Object Conversion from Command Line DOS Prompt UNIX This section explains how to execute assembly and object conversion from the command line 1 Assemble the sample program kOmain asm Input the following on the command line C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm The following message is output to the display 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD78054 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found 2 Check the contents of drive C The assembler outputs the object module file kOmain rel and the assemble list file KOmain prn If the option E is specified during assembly the assembler outputs an error list file a list of the lines containing assembly errors and the contents of their error messages 3 Assemble the sample program kOsub asm Input the following on the command line C gt ra78k0 c054 kOsub asm The following message is output to the display 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD78054 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found 62 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO 4 Check the contents of drive C The assembler outputs the object module file kOsub rel and the assemble lis
253. necessary a scalar can also be included in any section A symbol in the same section can be placed in one or more blocks The formats for the section definition field and the symbol definition field in the symbol block are shown in 210 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Table 7 9 and Table 7 10 Table 7 9 Symbol Block Section Definition Fields for Extended No of ASCII Field Characters Explanation 0 1 0 specifies that the field is a section definition field Base address 2 17 This is a section start address Number of characters is variable Length 2 17 Indicates the section length Number of characters is variable and is calculated by the following 1 higher address base address Table 7 10 Symbol Block Symbol Definition Fields for Extended Tech No of ASCII Field Characters Explanation Type 1 1 digit hexadecimal indicating global local symbol specification and type of value displayed 1 Global address 2 Global scalar 3 Global code address 4 Global data address 5 Local address 6 Local scalar 7 Local code address 8 Local data address Symbol 2 17 Indicates the symbol length Variable Numerical value 2 17 Value corresponding to a symbol Number of characters is variable Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 211 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Motorola S type format Motorola S type format files are converted from 5 record
254. ng E2801 Message Illegal debug information Cause The debug information in the source file is illegal Action by user Execute the compiler or structured assembler once again F2901 Message Can t open source file file name Cause Source file cannot be opened F2902 Message Can t open parameter file file name Cause Parameter file cannot be opened F2903 Message Can t open include file file name Cause Include file cannot be opened F2904 Message Illegal include file file name Cause A drive name only path name only or a device type file name is specified as an include file name F2905 Message Can t open overlay file file name Cause Overlay file cannot be opened Action by user Make sure the overlay file is in the same directory as the assembler execution format F2906 Message Illegal overlay file name Cause Contents of overlay file are illegal F2907 Message Can t open object file file name Cause Object file cannot be opened Action by user Use a disk with an open area in its directory F2908 Message Can t open print file file name Cause Assemble list file cannot be opened Action by user Use a disk with an open area in its directory F2909 Message Can t open error list file file name Cause Error list file cannot be opened Action by user Use a disk with an open area in its directory 338 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages
255. ng a parameter file Set the contents of the parameter file kKOmain pra as follows parameter file kOmain asm osample rel g c054 psample prn Enter the following on the command line C gt ra78k0 fkOmain pra Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 131 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 11 Specification of path for temporary file creation Specification of path for temporary file creation T Syntax T path name Default assumption Creates a temporary file in the path specified by the environmental variable TMP When no path is specified the temporary file is created in a current path Function Option T specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use option T to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Explanation Only apath can be specified as a path name The path name cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when assembly is finished They are also deleted when assembly is aborted by pressing CTRL C The path in which the temporary file is to be created is dete
256. nics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics RENESAS User s Manual RA78KO Ver 3 80 Assembler Package Operation Target Devices 78KO Series Document No U17199EJ1VOUMOO 1st edition Date Published February 2005 NEC Electronics Corporation 2005 Printed in Japan MEMO 2 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other couniries licensed exclusively though X Open Company Lid i386 is a trademark of Intel Corporation PC AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation HP9000 Series 700 and HP UX are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Inc SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International Inc Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc The information in this document is current as of February 2005 The information is subject to change without notice For actual design in refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc for the most up to date specifications of NEC Electronics p
257. nk list file are specified at the same name map specification time the option specified P NP Makes option P i unavailable last takes precedence 390 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS Table C 3 List of Linker Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted Link list file KM Outputs a map list If both options KM and KM data into a link list file NKM are specified at the specification same time the option specified last takes precedence NKM Makes option KM If options NKM NKP and unavailable NKL are all specified the link list file cannot be output even if option P is specified KD Outputs a link If option NKM is specified KD directive file into a option KD becomes link list file unavailable If both options KD and NKD Makes option KD NKD both KP and unavailable NKP or both KL and KP Outputs a public NKL are specified at the NKP symbol list into a link Same ime the option list file specified last takes precedence NKP Makes option KP If option NG is specified unavailable the public symbol list and local symbol list cannot be KL Output a local symbol output even if option KP or NKL list into a link list file KL is specified NKL Makes option KL unavailable Link list LL number Specifies number of If option NP is specified LL66 format
258. nowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely To minimize risks of damage to property or injury including death to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design such as redundancy fire containment and anti failure features e NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades Standard Special and Specific The Specific quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer designated quality assurance program for a specific application The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade as indicated below Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots Special Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems life support systems and medical equipment for life support etc The
259. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document bu
260. nv78k0 Itest Imf rtest1 rel test1 prn if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 Icnv78k0 Itest Imf rtest2 rel test2 prn if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 if YLEVEL 1 echo List conversion error if YLEVEL 1 goto END cis echo No error goto END ERR BAT echo Usage st bat chiptype END echo on User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 379 APPENDIX B NOTES ON USE In this chapter when using the RA78KO note the following points 1 Notes on device file A device file is required to execute the RA78KO The device file is not included in the RA78KO package and must be obtained separately Download the relevant device file from NEC Electronics Microcomputer home page http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html gt Development tools download ODS 2 Notes on Object Converter Use the object converter by specifying the R address source of object and U filling value specification options These options are specified by default If a ROM code is ordered work known as across processing or tape out when the addresses of the objects are not sorted an error occurs Therefore be sure to specify R do not cancel the specification 3 Notes on memory initialization quasi directives If memory initialization quasi directives DW and DB are described in a data segment DSEG object codes are output but the object converter outputs the warning message W4301 This is because a code exists at an address
261. on refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual Kanji code can also be specified by using the environmental variable LANF78K For details of the environmental variables refer to 11 2 Preparing Development Environment Environmental Variables Example of use The kanji code is interpreted as EUC code C ra78k0 kOmain asm c054 ze User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 133 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 13 Device file search path specification Device file search path specification Y Syntax path name Default assumption Device files will be read from the path determined in the following order i ii 2 Path by which RA78KO was started up 1 lt dev gt for the ra78k0 exe startup path iii 3 Current directory iv 4 The environmental variable PATH Function Reads a device file from the specified path Application Specify a path where a device file exists Explanation If anything other than a path name is specified after option Y an abort error occurs If the path name is omitted after option an abort error occurs The path from which the device file is read in the order determined as follows i Path specified by option Y ii lt dev gt for the ra78k0 exe startup path iii Path by which RA78KO was started up iv Current directory v The environmental variable PATH Example of use Spec
262. on that specifies the path for the parameter Action by user Specify a correct path name F6012 Message Missing parameter option Cause A necessary parameter has not been specified Action by user Specify the parameter User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 357 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 6 List Converter Error Messages ta Error Message F6013 Message Parameter not needed option Cause An unnecessary parameter has been specified Action by user Delete the unnecessary parameter F6014 Message Out of range option Cause The specified numerical value is outside the range Action by user Specify a correct numerical value F6015 Message Parameter is too long option Cause The number of characters in the parameter exceeds the limit Action by user Specify a parameter whose character number is within the limit F6016 Message Illegal parameter option Cause The syntax of the parameter is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct parameter F6017 Message Too many parameters option Cause The total number of parameters exceeds the limit Action by user Specify parameters within the number limit F6018 Message Option is not recognized option Cause The option name is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct option name F6019 Message Parameter file nested Cause The F option has been specified inside a
263. owing output levels are available 0 No warning message is output 1 Normal warning message is output 2 Detailed warning message is output For a detailed explanation conditions under which warnings are output refer 12 4 Linker Error Messages Example of use Specify level 2 in option W C5IK78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel w2 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 187 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 16 Link specification of boot area ROM program of flash ROM model Link specification of boot area ROM program of flash ROM model ZB Syntax ZB Default assumption No link specification Function Specifies the first address of the flash ROM area Explanation Specifies linking of the boot area ROM program of a flash ROM model and the first address of the flash ROM area f no address is specified an error occurs Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Example of use C gt Ik78k0 kOmain asm zb2000h 188 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 17 On chip debug program size specification On chip debug program size specification GO Syntax GO size Default assumption On chip debug is not used Function Specifies whether on chip debug is used or not Application Specify the GO option to change the on chip debug program size Explanation If
264. pacity condition of media etc of the disk used to attempt to create temporary file F3906 Message Can t write map file file name Cause Data cannot be written to the link list file Action by user Check condition open capacity condition of media etc of the disk used to attempt to create link list file F3907 Message Can t write output file file name Cause Data cannot be written to the load module file Action by user Check condition open capacity condition of media etc of the disk used to attempt to create output file F3908 Message Can t access temporary file file name Cause Temporary file cannot be written Action by user Check condition open capacity condition of media etc of the disk used to attempt to create temporary file F3909 Message Can t read DEVICE FILE file device file name Cause Device file corresponding to device specified by each tool 78 5 78 78 0 used until the link stage cannot be read User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 347 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Caution The address shown in address xxxxH in the messages in E3301 to E3306 are absolute addresses after segment allocation 348 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 5 Object Converter Error Messages Table 12 4 Object Converter Error Messages Error Message F4001 Message Missing input file Cause A
265. paths for reading a library file is described outside the limit input range Action by user Specify a number of paths within the limit range and retry Button OK Close the message box 368 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 9 Error Messages Displayed by the Linker LK78K0 DLL Error Error Message Message library file read path Too many characters for Library File Search Path Cause The library file read path is described with a number of characters outside the limit input range Action by user Specify the library file read path with a number of characters within the limit range Button Ok Close the message box Message library file read path Multiple Library File Search Path definition Cause Library file read paths are described in duplicate Action by user Delete the duplicate path s and retry Button Ok Close the message box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 369 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 8 4 Object Converter 78 0 Table 12 10 Error Messages Displayed by the Object Converter OC78K0 DLL Error Error Message x Message Cannot find OC78K0 EXE shown in environmental variable PATH Cause The OC78K0 EXE execution format is not in the specified directory Action by user Re install the RA78K0 assembler package Button OK Close the message
266. pecified folder could not be created Action by user Specify another folder Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid order size with TAB number Cause A value whose size relation is illegal has been specified as the number of tabs Action by user Specify a value within the usable range Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of number of tabs until the instruction is from 0 to 97 Cause A value outside the range is described as the number of tabs up to an instruction Action by user Specify a value within the usable range Button Ok Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of number of tabs until an operand is from 0 to 98 Cause A value outside the range is described as the number of tabs up to an operand Action by user Specify a value in the usable range Button OK Close the message box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 361 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 7 Error Messages Displayed by the Structured Assembler Preprocessor ST78K0 DLL Error Type Error Message Message Invalid value The range of number of tabs until a comment is from 0 to 99 Cause A value outside the range is specified as the number of tabs up to a comment Action by user Specify a value in the usable range Button OK Close the message box Message Invalid word symbo
267. plication Use option T to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Explanation Only apath can be specified as a path name The path name cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when assembly is finished They are also deleted when assembly is aborted by pressing CTRL C The path in which the temporary file is to be created is determined according to the following sequence i The path specified by option T ii The path specified by environmental variable TMP when option T is omitted iii The current path when TMP is not set When i or ii is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use Specify output of a temporary file to directory TMP C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel t tmp User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 185 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 14 Device file search path specification Device file search path specification Y Syntax path name Default assumption Device files will be read from the path determined in t
268. plus help click the Help button in the lt Library File Name gt dialog box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 255 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Example of use When option is specified a help message is output on the display C 1b78k0 78K 0 Series Librarian Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Subcommands create add delete replace pick list help exit Usage subcommand option masterL BF option transaction option transaction OMFname LBFname lt create gt create masterLBF transaction lt add gt masterLBF transaction lt delete gt delete masterLBF modulename lt replace gt replace masterLBF transaction lt pick gt pick masterLBF modulename lt list gt list option masterLBF modulename option p output public symbol np no output public symbol 0 filename specify output file name lt help gt help lt exit gt exit 256 User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 8 5 Subcommands 8 51 Types of subcommands The subcommands provide detailed directions for the operation of the librarian Subcommands are classified into eight types Table 8 3 Subcommands Subcommand Name Abbrev Explanation CREATE Creates a new library file ADD A Adds a module to a library file
269. ported for this device Cause A Security ID cannot be used with the specified device Action by user Do not specify a Security ID Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 341 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages Error umber Error Message F3101 Message File name invalid input file or made by different hostmachine Cause File other than object module file was input or link was attempted with object module file created on an incompatible host machine E3102 Message Directive syntax error Cause Specification of directive is incorrect F3103 Message File name Illegal processor type Cause Target device of assemble or compile is not a target device of this linker Action by user Check to ensure that the object module file is correct Check to ensure that the target device for the assemble or compile can be handled by the linker Also check that the overlay file is the correct version The linker references part of the overlay file of the assembler to obtain characteristic data on the target device F3104 Message File name Different processor type from first input file first input file name Cause An object module file is input whose target device is different from that of the first input object module file W3105 Message Library file file name has no public symbol Cause Library file has no public symbol T
270. ption Assembler Sorce Options zl Command Line Options Cancel 88 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR Figure 4 4 lt Structured Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected Structured Assembler Options User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 89 4 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 5 2 Options The following is an explanation of each option in the lt Structured Assembler Options gt dialog box lt lt Output gt gt Tab ASM Source File o When specified by common option Output Path Name Specify the path of the ASM source secondary source file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name When specified by individual option Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the ASM source secondary source file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Number of Tabs wt Specify the number of tabs of the translated assembly language The number of tabs up to an instruction the number of tabs up to an operand and the number of tabs up to a comment can be individually set Output Debug Information gs Check this option to output debug information in the ASM source secondary source file Change Source Regulation Z Select the type of Kanji code SJIS zs UEC ze or no Kanji code zn to be used in the comments of the sourc
271. ptions is selected from the Tools menu of PM Option setting method plus or if the RA button on the toolbar is pressed Assembler options can be set by inputting the required options in this dialog box 140 r Object Module File o Output Path Name M Browse Output Debugging Information to Object File V Local Symbol Data g Assembler Source Debugging Data ga T Create Error List File e Output Path Name zl Browse Common Object Module File common Command Line Options Figure 5 2 lt Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output gt gt Tab Is Selected Assembler Options 3 Dutputl Others x Cancel Apply Help User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Figure 5 3 lt Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Is Selected Assembler Options xi Output Dutpu2 Others Output Path Name x Browse Output Assemble List ka Output Symbol List ks Output Cross Reference List kx Form Feed at End of Print Filef lf Colums per Line Iw 32 4 Lines per Page ll 66 Expand Character It 8 m List Header String Ih Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 4 lt Assembler Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected Assembler Options B xd
272. put a map list to a link list file Explanation If options NKM NKP and NKL are all specified the link list file cannot be output If option NKM is specified the link directive file cannot be output to a link list file f both options KM and NKM are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NP is specified option KM is unavailable Example of use Output a map list into link list file C gt lk78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel km This references User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 169 170 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx Command kOmain rel kOsub rel km Para file Out file KOMAIN LMF Map file KO MAP Direc file Directive kkk Link information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data 23 symbol s defined kkk Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 8000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE CODE CODE SAMPM gap 0002H CSEG CSEG SAMPM CSEG SAMPS gap MEMORY LRAM BASE ADDRESS FACOH SIZE 0020H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE MEMORY RAM BASE ADDRESS FB00H SIZE 0500H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE gap DATA DATA SAMPM gap gap Not Free Area BASE ADDRESS 0000H 0000H 007EH 0080H 0080H 0093H 00 BASE ADDRESS BAS
273. puts data on modules in a library file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER9 LIST CONVERTER The list converter inputs assemble list files and object module files output by the assembler and load module files output by the linker The list converter then embeds actual addresses in the relocatable addresses and symbols in the input file and outputs an absolute assembly list This eliminates the troublesome task of looking at an assemble list while referring to a link map 9 1 I O Files of List Converter The I O files of the list converter are as shown below Table 9 1 I O Files of List Converter Type File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Object module files These are binary files including rel relocation data and symbol data regarding machine language data and machine language location addresses Assemble list files These are files containing assembly prn data such as assemble lists and cross reference lists Load module files These are binary image files which Imf contain object code as a result of linking Parameter files These files contain the parameters for plv the executed program These files are created by the user Output files Absolute assemble list This is a list file which embeds actual p files addresses in relocatable addresses and symbols in the input file Error list files These are files containing error data elv generated during list conv
274. r Delete the unnecessary parameter F3014 Message Out of range option Cause The specified numerical value is outside the range Action by user Specify a correct numerical value F3015 Message Parameter is too long option Cause The number of characters in the parameter exceeds the limit Action by user Specify a parameter whose character number is within the limit F3016 Message Illegal parameter option Cause The syntax of the parameter is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct parameter F3017 Message Too many parameters option Cause The total number of parameters exceeds the limit Action by user Specify parameters within the number limit F3018 Message Option is not recognized option Cause The option name is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct option name F3019 Message Parameter file nested Cause The F option has been specified inside a parameter file Action by user Do not specify the F option inside a parameter file F3020 Message Parameter file read error file name Cause The parameter file cannot be read Action by user Specify a correct parameter file F3021 Message Memory allocation failed Cause There is insufficient memory Action by user Secure the necessary memory F3030 Message On chip debug is not supported for this device Cause The on chip debug function cannot be used with the specified device Action by user Do not specify the on chip debug function F3031 Message Security ID is not sup
275. r s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR Example of use When the option is specified the help message is output to the display C gt st78k0 Structured assembler preprocessor for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Usage st78k0 option input file option The option is as follows means omissible means repetition CX Select target chip x 000 012 etc Must be specified 0 file Create the assembler source file with the specified name e file Create the error list file with the specified name ffile Input options or source file name from specified file idirectory Set include search path sc character Specify the last character of word symbol wint wt n1 n2 wt n1 n2 n3 Specify the number of tabs up to output position of each field n1 Output position mnemonic field n2 Output position operand field Must be n3 Output position comment field 0 lt lt n2 lt n3 lt 100 dname data name data Define name with data gs ngs Output the structured assembler source debug information to assembler source file Not j Create the assembler source file if fatal error occurred zs ze zn Change source regulation 25 SJIS code usable in comment Press RETURN to continue ze EUC code usable in
276. r Options Output Output2 Others Barameterfile f _ Browse Other options z Reset Option data read Option data save Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 5 2 Option settings The various options in the lt Object Converter Options gt dialog box are described below lt lt Output gt gt Tab Create HEX Module o Check this option to output a HEX format object module file Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the object module file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Object Complement u Specify this object to write a code in advance to addresses to which a HEX format object is not output to prevent unwanted codes from being written to those addresses and the program from hanging up Sort HEX Object by Address r Check this option if the HEX format objects must be sorted in address order Divide HEX Files for the Product with Flash ROM zf Check this option to output the boot area and other areas of a product that contains flash memory to separate HEX format files Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Create Symbo
277. r directly inputting a path and file name Output Symbol Information g Check this option to add debug information local symbol information to the load module file Create Error List File e Check this option to output an error list file Output File Name Specify the path name and file name of the error list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name On Chip Debug go Check this option to use the on chip debug function SIZE Specify the on chip debug program size Security ID gi Check this option to set a security ID ID Specify a security ID Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Create Link Map File p Check this option to output a link list file Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the link list file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path and file name Output Map List km Check this option to output a map file in the link list file Output Directive File Image kd Check this option to output a link directive file in the link list file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 197 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Output Public Symbol List kp Check this option to output a public symbol list in the link list file Output Local Symbol List kl Check this option to output a local symbol list in the link list file Add Form Fee
278. r file when the data required to start up the assembler will not fit on the command line or when repeating the same assembler option for two or more assembly operations To start up the assembler from a parameter file specify the parameter file option F on the command line Start up the assembler from a parameter file as follows X gt ra78k0 A source module file A F parameter file name T T b a a A file which includes the data required to start up the assembler b Parameter file the specified option Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows Joption A option A A If the source module file name is omitted from the command line only 1 source module file name can be specified in the parameter file The source module file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all assembler options and output file names specified in the command line For a detailed explanation of parameter files refer to 5 4 3 Explanation of assembler options Example Create the parameter file KOmain pra using an editor lt Contents of kOmain pra gt parameter file kOmain asm osample rel psample prn Use parameter file kOmain pra to start up the assembler C gt ra78k0 fkOmain pra User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 3 3 Execution start and end mess
279. r is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx xxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx 2 Execution end message If it detects no link errors resulting from the link the linker outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Link complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects a link error resulting from the link the linker outputs the error number to the display and returns control to the operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Link complete 1 error s and 0 warning s found If the linker detects a fatal error during linking which makes it unable to continue link processing the linker outputs a message to the display cancels linking and returns control to the operating system Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 157 158 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Example 1 A non existent object module file is specified C IK78k0 samp1 rel samp2 rel 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx Xxxx 78 error F3006 File not found SAMP1 REL 78 error F3006 File not found SAMP2 REL Program Aborted In the above example a non existent object module file is specified An error results and the linker aborts th
280. reate a parameter file and perform assembly lt Contents of parameter file k0 slb gt library creation command create kO lib add kO lib kOmain rel amp kOsub rel exit Enter the following on the command line C gt lb78k0 kO0 slb 320 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF RA78K0 11 6 Object Module Library Formation The assembler and linker create 1 file for every 1 output module When there are many object modules therefore the number of files also increases The RA78KO incorporates a function for collecting a number of object modules in a single file This function is called module library formation A file which forms such a library is called a library file Library files can be input to the linker Therefore when performing modular programming library files containing common modules can be created enabling efficient file management and operation Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 321 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES This chapter explains the causes of error messages output by the RA78KO s programs structured assembler preprocessor assembler linker object converter and librarian and the action to be taken by the user 12 1 Overview of Error Messages Error messages output by the RA78KO are divided into the following 4 levels 1 Abort error Fxxxx An error has occurred which makes the program unable to continue processing The program quits interrupts immediately If the abor
281. reated Action by user Specify another folder Button OK Close the message box 370 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 8 5 Librarian LB78K0 Table 12 11 Error Messages Displayed by the Librarian LB78K0 DLL Error Error Message x Message Cannot find LB78K0 EXE shown in environmental variable PATH Cause The LB78K0 EXE execution format is not in the specified directory Action by user Re install the RA78K0 assembler package Button OK Close the message box Message Cannot find folder Will you create Cause The specified folder does not exist Action by user Create a folder or select another folder Button Ok Creates a folder and close the message box Cancel Close the message box Message Not make folder Cause The specified folder could not be created Action by user Specify another folder Button OK Close the message box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 371 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 8 6 List Converter LCNV78KO Table 12 12 Error Messages Displayed by the List Converter LCNV78KO DLL Error Error Message x Message Cannot find LCNV78K0 EXE shown in environmental variable PATH Cause The LCNV78K0 EXE execution format is not in the specified directory Action by user Re install the RA78K0 assembler package Button OK
282. recedence If option NO is specified option J is unavailable Example of use Specify output of object module file even if a fatal error occurs C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm 106 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 4 Debug data output specification Debug data output specification G NG GA NGA G NG Syntax G NG Default assumption G Function Option G specifies that debugging data local symbol data is to be added to an object module file Option NG makes option G unavailable Application Use option G when performing symbolic debugging of data that includes local symbol data Use option NG in the following cases i Symbolic debugging of global symbols only ii Debugging without symbols iii When only the object is required evaluation using PROM etc Explanation If both options G and NG are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Option GA takes precedence over other options regardless of the position in which it is specified If option NO is specified option G is unavailable Notice Acontrol instruction with the same function as options G and NG can be written at the beginning of a source module A A DEBUG A ADG abbreviated form A NODEBUG A ANODG abbreviated form For information on control instructions refer to RA78K0 As
283. replace k0 lib m2 rel lt Before replacement gt k0 lib M1 M2 M2 M3 lt After replacement gt k0 lib M1 M3 M2 Because the new module M2 is registered after the module M2 in the library file is deleted M2 is last in order in the library file 262 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN 5 PICK PICK Syntax PICK A library file name A A module name A A Default assumption P Function The PICK subcommand retrieves a specified module from an existing library file Explanation retrieved module becomes an object module file with the file name under which it was registered in the library file specified module name does not exist in the library file an error will result If an error occurs processing is interrupted However if an error occurs when two or more modules are specified the modules retrieved before the module which caused the error become available and are saved onto disk Example of use Retrieve a module M2 from a library file pick kO lib m2 rel Before pickup gt 1 2 M3 lt After pickup gt kO lib M1 M2 M2 M3 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 263 CHA
284. ress DD DD Hexadecimal data 1 byte of data is expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal ZZ Check sum The lower 1 byte of complement 1 for the sum for each byte of the record length address and the hexadecimal data expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal 08 00FF11 D4520A20 t i eq ii iii v v i ii i iv Record type 52 Record length 8 bytes Load addresses 24 bit address Hexadecimal data Check sum 1 SO record 50 T iii ZZ iv Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in iii plus the number of bytes in iv File name Check sum User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 213 214 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 2 S2 record XX WWWWWWDD DD ZZ T T T T 1 iil iv v iii iv v Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in iii plus the number of bytes in iv plus the number of bytes in v Load address This is the 24 bit load address of the data in iv within the range OH to FFFFFFH Data This is the loaded data itself Check sum 3 S3 record S3 XX WWWWWWWYN DD DD ZZ T T T i ii iil iv i Record type iii iv v Record length This is the number of bytes in iii plus the number of bytes in iv plus the number of bytes in v Load address This is the 24 bit load
285. rmined according to the following sequence i The path specified by option T ii The path specified by environmental variable TMP when option T is omitted iii The current path when TMP is not set When a or b is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use Specify output of a temporary file to directory c tmp C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm tc tmp 132 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 12 Kanji code specification Kanji code specification ZS ZE ZN Syntax Default assumption Interpreted as follows depending on the OS ZS Windows HP UX ZE SunOS Solaris Function Kanji described in the comment is interpreted as the specified kanji code Kanji code is interpreted as follows depending on the option 45 Shift JIS code ZE EUC code ZN Not interpreted as kanji Application These options are used to specify the interpretation of the kanji code of the kanji in the comment line Explanation If the ZS ZE and ZN options are specified at the same time the one specified later takes priority The control instruction that functions as the ZS ZE and ZN options can be described at the start of the source module The syntax is shown below A A KANJICODE A SJIS A AKANJICODE A EUC A A A NONE For details of the control instructi
286. roducts Not all products and or types are available in every country Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information e No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products No license express implied or otherwise is granted under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others e Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples The incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of a customer s equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software and information e While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products customers agree and ack
287. rom the command line Specification T path name Creates a temporary Independent Path specified of path for file in a specified by the temporary path environmental file creation variable TMP Device file Y path name Reads a device file Independent Reads device search path from the specified files from specification path lt dev gt for the IK78k0 exe startup path Warning W level Specifies whether or Independent Outputs an message not a warning ordinary error output message is output to message specification the console Link ZB Specifies the first Independent None specification address of the flash of boot area ROM area ROM program of flash ROM model On chip GO size Specifies the on chip Independent None debug debug program size program size specification Security ID GI Security Specifies a Security Independent None specification ID ID Help Displays a help All other options are No display specification message on the unavailable display User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS C 4 List of Object Converter Options Table C 4 List of Object Converter Options 1 Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted HEX format O file name Outputs a HEX If both options O and NO O input file object format object module are specified at the same name hex f
288. ror if errorlevel 1 goto END cls oc78k0 rasample if errorlevel 1 echo Object conversion error if errorlevel 1 goto END cls set LEVEL 0 Icnv78k0 lrasample Imf rkOmain rel kOmain prn if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 Icnv78k0 lrasample mf rkOsub rel kOsub prn if errorlevel 1 set LEVEL 1 if YLEVEL 1 echo List conversion error if YLEVEL 1 goto END cls echo No error goto END ERR BAT echo Usage ra bat chiptype END echo on Execute the batch file Specify the target device type and execute the RA78KO operation verification batch program C gt ra bat 0058 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 51 CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 The following message is output to the display 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete Oerror s and 0 warning s found 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 Start Pass Start Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete Oerror s and 0 warning s found Clear the screen 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Link complete 0
289. ry file E5106 Message Module already exists module file name Cause A module of the same name already exists in the updated library file or another input file E5107 Message Master library file is not specify Cause Updated library file is not specified in a previous operation but the library file name is replaced with 354 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 5 Librarian Error Messages Error Message E5108 Message Multiple transaction file file file name Cause Input object module files overlap E5109 Message Public symbol already exists symbol symbol name Cause An externally defined symbol name already exists in an updated library file or other input file E5110 Message File specification conflicted file file name Cause Specified input file name is same as output file name E5111 Message Illegal file format file file name Cause Format of an updated library file or other input file is incorrect E5112 Message Library file not found file file name Cause Specified library file is not found E5113 Message Object module file not found file file name Cause Specified object module file is not found E5114 Message No free space for temporary file Cause Sufficient space does not exist in the disk to create a temporary file E5115 Message Not enough memory Cause Sufficient memory is not available
290. ry is not sufficient to operate the program F4106 Message Illegal symbol table Cause A mistake exists in the symbol table of the input load module file Action by user If the source is written in C make sure that the assembler code in the C source satisfies the following conditions Conditions If a local symbol is used use a symbol that starts with string L such as L 201 or 7L sym However keep this symbol to within 8 characters Do not define this symbol externally PUBLIC declaration F4107 Message Can t specify U option for ROMIess device Cause The object complement specification U option is specified for a model without internal ROM E4200 Message Undefined symbol symbol name Cause A symbol whose address is undetermined has been found Action by user Define the symbol s value This symbol is referenced as an external reference symbol If it is not externally defined specify an external definition outside the module in which the value of the symbol is defined E4201 Message Out of address range Cause The address of an object in a load module file is out of range W4300 Message XXXXXXH yyyyyyH overlapped Cause Objects overlapped in the address from xxxxxxH to yyyyyyH are output W4301 Message Can t initialize RAM area address address Cause Initial value data is output to the RAM area Action by user If DB DW is described in DSEG of the assembly source change it to DS or describe the DB DW instr
291. s Error Message F1001 Message Missing input file Cause An input file has not been specified Action by user Specify an input file F1002 Message Too many input files Cause Two or more input files have been specified Action by user Specify only one input file F1004 Message Illegal file name file name Cause Either there are illegal characters in the file name or the number of characters exceeds the limit Action by user Input a file name that has legal characters and is within the character number limit F1005 Message Illegal file specification file name Cause An illegal file has been specified Action by user Specify a legal file F1006 Message File not found file name Cause The specified file does not exist Action by user Specify an existent file F1008 Message File specification conflicted file name Cause An I O file name has been specified in duplicate Action by user Specify different I O file names F1009 Message Unable to make file file name Cause The specified file is write protected Action by user Release the write protection on the specified file F1010 Message Directory not found file name Cause A non existent drive and or directory has been included in the output file name Action by user Specify an existent drive and or directory F1011 Message Illegal path option Cause Other
292. s specification a specified file can only be input from the command line Device file Y path name Reads a device file Independent lt dev gt for search path from the specified path by which specification path OC78K0 was started up User s Manual U17199EJ1 VOUM 393 APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS Table C 4 List of Object Converter Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted File separate ZF Adds an option that Independent None output separately outputs specification the boot area and for flash other areas to ROM model separate HEX format files when linking of the boot area ROM program of a flash memory model is specified Help 55 Displays a help All other options are No display specification message on the unavailable display 394 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C LIST OF OPTIONS C 5 List of Librarian Options Table C 5 List of Librarian Options Interpretation Classification Format Function Relation to Other Options When Omitted List file LW Changes the number Unavailable if the LIST LW132 format number of of characters thatcan subcommand is not specification characters be printed in 1 line specified a list file LL number Changes the number LL66 of lines of lines that can be printed in 1 page ina list file LF Inserts a form feed If both options LF
293. s Function When any of the programs of the RA78KO finishes processing the program stores the maximum level of errors occurring during processing as the EXIT status and returns control to the operating system The EXIT statuses are as follows Normal operation 0 WARNING occurs 0 FATAL ERROR occurs 1 ABORT 2 The exit status can be used to create a batch file making operation more efficient Example of use lt Contents of the batch file ra bat gt ra78KO 014 kOmain g e echo off IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR echo echo on ra78KO 014 kOsub asm g e echo off IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR echo echo on Ik78KO kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 Imf g echo off IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR echo echo on 0c78K0 k0 Imf echo off IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR GOTO EXIT ERR echo Error occurred EXIT 314 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF 78 Perform processing using batch file ra bat C ra bat User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 315 CHAPTER 11 EFFICIENT USE OF 78 11 2 Preparing Development Environment Environmental Variables The RA78KO supports the following environmental variables for preparing the software development environment PATH Search path for execution format INC78K0 Search path for include file structured assembler preprocessor and assembler LIB78KO Search path for library file linker only TMP Path for creating te
294. s a user defined parameter file by using the Browse button or directly inputting a file name Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 143 144 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Other Options To specify an option other than the options that can be set in this dialog box enter the option in the input box Caution The help specification option cannot be specified on PM plus Reset Resets the input contents Option data read Opens the lt Read Option Data gt dialog box and after the option data file has been specified reads this file Option data save Opens the lt Save Option Data gt dialog box and save the option data to the option data file with a name Command Line Options This edit box is read only The currently set option character string is displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 3 Edit option dialog box Items are edited in list format in the lt Edit Option gt dialog box The lt Edit Option gt dialog box is described below Figure 5 5 lt Edit Option gt Dialog Box Edit Option x LIST T Add Up Delete Down Add Sub Directory Cancel Figure 5 6 lt Add Option gt Dialog Box x Caes Add button Adds a list item If the item to be added is a file or directory the corresponding lt Browse for Folder gt dialog box opens In all other cases the lt Add Option gt dialog box opens Specify details of the item to be added in this box
295. s described in duplicate for the symbol definition Action by user Delete the duplicate symbol and retry Button OK Close the message box User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 365 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 8 Error Messages Displayed by the Assembler RA78K0 DLL Error Error Message Message Can t set options to source file name Cause If acommon option is reflected on an individual option specification of the individual option becomes illegal Action by user Check the specification of the individual option and retry Button Ok Close the message box 366 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 8 3 Linker LK78K0 Table 12 9 Error Messages Displayed by the Linker LK78K0 DLL Error Error Message x Message Cannot find LK78K0 EXE shown in environmental variable PATH Cause The LK78K0 EXE execution format is not in the specified directory Action by user Re install the RA78K0 assembler package Button OK Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of warning level is from 0 to 2 Cause A value outside the limit input range is specified as the warning level Action by user Specify a value within the limit range Button OK Close the message box Message Invalid value The range of flash start address is from 0h to 0ffffh Cause A value outside the input lim
296. s handled as a comment Example The underlined portion is a comment DIRECTIVE FILE FOR 78054 MEMORY MEM1 01000H 1000H SECOND MEMORY AREA User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 6 4 2 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Memory directives A memory directive is a directive which defines a memory area name of an address in the installed memory The name of a defined memory area the memory area name is used to reference a segment location directive Up to 100 memory areas can be defined including the default memory area Syntax MEMORY A memory area name A A A start address value A sizeA A memory space name 1 Memory area names Specify a name for the defined memory area Conditions for specification of memory area names are as follows The characters which can be used to describe a memory area name A Z a z 0 9 _ and However a memory area name cannot begin with 0 9 Uppercase and lowercase characters are interpreted as separate characters Uppercase and lowercase characters can be mixed together Maximum length of a memory area name is 31 characters If 32 or more characters are described an error results Each memory area name must exist in only 1 location in the entire memory space The same memory area name cannot be used for a different memory area even if they are in different memory spaces Figure 6 1 Memory Area Names lt Example of identical memory areas gt lt Exampl
297. s into 3 types The composition of the entire file is shown in Figure 7 4 Types of records are shown in Table 7 11 Table 7 11 Motorola HEX File Record Types Item Record Type Header record optional S0 Data record S2 Standard 24 bits S3 32 bits End record S8 Standard 24 bits S7 32 bits Figure 7 4 Motorola S Type Format Header record Data record Data record End record Motorola HEX format files are divided into standard 24 bit addresses and 32 bit addresses Standard addresses are composed of records SO S2 and S8 The 32 bit addresses are composed of records SO S3 and S7 Header record SO is optional and is not output A CR character is placed at the end of each S record The general formats and their meanings for each field in each record are shown in Table 7 12 and Table 7 13 Table 7 12 General Format for Each Record Record Type General Format S0 SOXXYY YYZZZZ S2 S2XXWWWWWNWDD DDZZ S3 S3XXWWWWWWWNWDD DDZZ S7 S7XXWWWWWWWWZZ S8 S8XXWWWWWWZZ 212 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Table 7 13 Meanings of Fields Field Meaning Sn Record type XX Length of data record Number of bytes in the address hexadecimal data and check sum YY YY File name ASCII code for the input file name expressed as a hexadecimal WWWWWW WW 24th 32th bit add
298. s of directive file memory RAM Ofe20h 1000h Link information 3 output segment s 48H byte s real data 23 symbol s defined kkk Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 1000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 0002H CSEG AT User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER c KP NKP Syntax KP NKP Default assumption NKP Function Option KP outputs a public symbol list into a link list file Option NKP makes option KP unavailable Application Specify option KP to output a public symbol list into a link list file Explanation If options NKM NKP and NKL are all specified the link list file cannot be output If options NG is specified the public symbol list cannot be output f both options KP and NKP are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence If option NP is specified option KP is unavailable Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 173 174 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Example of use Output a public symbol list into a link list file KO map C gt lk78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g kp This references 78K 0 Series Linker Vx xx Command kOmain rel kOsub rel g kp Para file Out file KOMAIN LMF Map file KO MAP Direc file Directive Link information 3
299. s specified C gt ra78k0 sample asm 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx Copyright NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx 78 error F2006 File not found SAMPLE ASM Program aborted In the above example a non existent source module file is specified An error results and the assembler aborts assembly Example 2 A non existent assembler option is specified C ra78k0 kOmain asm z 78K 0 Series Assembler Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx RA78KO error F2012 Missing parameter z Please enter RA78KO0 if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example a non existent assembler option is specified An error results and the assembler aborts assembly When an error message is displayed and assembly is aborted look for the cause in CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES and take action accordingly User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 99 5 4 Assembler Options CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 4 1 Types of assembler options The assembler options are detailed instructions for the operation of the assembler classified into 17 types Table 5 2 Assembler Options Classification Option Explanation Device type specification C Specifies the device type of the target device Object module file output O Specifies the output of an object
300. s the destination and file name of the output file Option NP makes option P KM KD KP KL LL and LF unavailable Application Specify option P to change the output destination or output file name of a link list file Specify option NP when performing link only to output a load module file This will shorten link time Explanation A file name can be specified as a disk type file name or as a device type file name However only CON PRN NUL and AUX can be specified as device type file names If CLOCK is specified an abort error will occur output file name is omitted when option P is specified the link list file name in the current directory becomes input file name map If only the output file name is specified input file name map is output to the specified path df both options P and NP are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Create a link list file KO map C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel 168 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 7 Link list file data specification Link list file data specification KM NKM KD NKD KP NKP KL NKL KM NKM Syntax KM NKM Default assumption KM Function Option KM outputs a map list into a link list file Option NKM makes option KM unavailable Application Specify option KM to out
301. scribed below 2 2 1 Installation of Windows version 1 Starting up Windows Power on the host machine and peripherals and start Windows 2 Set supply media Set the RA78K0 s supply media in the appropriate drive CD ROM drive of the host machine The setup programs will start automatically Perform the installation by following the messages displayed in the monitor screen Caution If the setup program does not start automatically execute SETUP EXE in the RA78KO DISK1 folder 3 Confirmation of files Using Windows Explorer etc check that the files contained in the RA78KO0 s supply media have been installed to the host machine For the details of each folder refer to 2 4 Directory Configuration 38 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION 2 2 2 Installation of UNIX version Install the UNIX version with the following procedure Installation to nectools bin is assumed here 1 Login Log in to the host machine 2 Directory selection Go to the install directory cd nectools bin 3 Setting of supply media Set the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 4 Copying of files Execute the cp command to copy the files from the CD ROM copy the files after checking that the CD ROM has been set in the CD ROM drive 5 Setting of environmental variable PATH Add nectools bin to the environmental variable PATH User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 39 CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLAT
302. sembler Package Language User s Manual User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 107 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use Specify addition of debug data to an object module file C gt ra78k0 054 kOmain asm g 108 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER b GA NGA Syntax GA NGA Default assumption GA Function Option GA specifies that source debugging data is to be added to an object module file by the structured assembler Option NGA makes option GA unavailable Application Use option GA when performing debugging at the source level of the assembler or structured assembler To perform debugging at the source level you will need the separately available integrated debugger Use option NGA in the following 2 cases i Debugging without an assembler source ii When only the object is required evaluation using PROM etc iii Debugging at the source level of the C compiler structured assembler Explanation If both options GA and NGA are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Option GA takes precedence over other options regardless of the position in which it is specified If option NO is specified option GA is unavailable Notice A control instruction with the same function as options GA and NGA can be written at the beginning of a source module A A DEBUGA A A NODEBUGA For
303. sequent characters are ignored processing W2702 Message Duplicate PROCESSOR option and control Cause Command line specification option for target device C and PROCESSOR directive in source header are both specified Program Command line specification option for target device C is available and processing PROCESSOR directive in source header is ignored 336 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages ta a Error Message W2703 Message Multiple defined module name Cause NAME directive is defined 2 or more times Program NAME directive is unavailable and the already defined module name is available processing W2704 Message Already declared EXTRN symbol symbol name Cause This symbol is already declared EXTRN Action by user Specify EXTRN declaration once in 1 module W2705 Message Already declared EXTBIT symbol symbol name Cause This symbol is already declared EXTBIT Action by user Specify EXTBIT declaration once in 1 module W2706 Message Missing END statement Cause END statement is not written at end of source file Program Assumes that END statement is described at end of source file processing W2707 Message Illegal statement after END directive Cause Item other than comment space tab or CR code is described after END statement Program Ignores everything after END statement processing
304. ser s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 7 List converter The list converter inputs the object module files and assemble list file output by the assembler and the load module file output by the linker and outputs an absolute assemble list file Relocatable assemble list files have the disadvantage that addresses and relocatable values in the list may be different from their actual values An absolute assemble list file determines these values making debugging and program maintenance easier Figure 1 15 Function of List Converter Assemble list file Object module file Load module file Input Input Input List Converter Output Absolute assemble list file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 31 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 8 Debugger The debugger for the 78KO Series is a software tool which displays the data from source programs registers and memories in their respective windows and performs debugging The debugger downloads the load module file output by the linker to the in circuit emulator IE of the target System It can also perform debugging at the source level by reading the source program file The debugger and IE are separate packages and are sold separately from the RA78KO Figure 1 16 Function of Debugger Source program Load module file Assembler Object module file Structured Debugging assembler information C compiler Debugger Dedicated parallel interface In circuit emulator 32 U
305. ser s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 3 Reminders Before Program Development Refer to the following before beginning program development 1 3 1 Maximum performance of RA78K0 1 Maximum performance of structured assembler Table 1 1 Maximum Performance of Structured Assembler Item Maximum Value Line length not including LF or CR 2048 characters Number of symbols registered in define directive excluding reserved words 512 symbols Character length of symbol registered in define directive 31 characters Notes 1 The maximum value is expressed as follows 1 S2s 582 833 Up to 33 symbols and 32 equal 2 signs can be inserted Notes 2 The maximum value is expressed as follows expression 1 amp amp expression 2 amp amp amp amp expression 16 amp amp expression 17 Up to 17 expression s and 16 amp amp or signs can be inserted User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Nesting levels in control statement 31 levels Nesting levels in ifdef directive 8 levels defcallt directives 32 Nesting of include directives Not supported Number of redefinitions by define directive 31 times Number of operands assigned in a series 33Notet Logical operator operands 47Note2 Number of symbols defined by D option 30 Number of library file paths specifiable by I option 64 33 2 34 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Maximum performance of assembler Table 1 2 Maxi
306. source programs coded in the assembly language for 78K0 Series microcontrollers into machine language coding The RA78KO contains six programs Structured Assembler Preprocessor Assembler Linker Object Converter Librarian and List Converter In addition a PM plus that helps you perform a series of operations including editing compiling assembling linking and debugging your program on Windows is also supplied with the RA78KO Figure 1 1 RA78K0 Assembler Package STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR ASSEMBLER LINKER RA78KO0 Assembler Package OBJECT CONVERTER LIBRARIAN LIST CONVERTER PM plus N User s Manual U17199EJ1 VOUM 1 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 What is an assembler 1 Assembly language and machine language 18 An assembly language is the most fundamental programming language for a microcontroller Programs and data are required for the microprocessor in a microcontroller to do its job These programs and data must be written by users to the memory of the microcontroller The programs and data handled by the microcontroller are collections of binary numbers called machine language For users however machine language code is difficult to remember causing errors to occur frequently Fortunately methods exist whereby English abbreviations or mnemonics are used to represent the meanings of the original machine language codes in a way that is easy for users to comprehend The basic programming languag
307. specify option R Explanation dfafatal error occurs the absolute assemble list file cannot be output If only the primary name of the input file name is specified the list converter will assign the file type rel and input the file Example of use Assemble list file name is kOmain prn the object module file name is sample rel and the load module file name is kO Imf C gt Icnv78k0 kOmain prn rsample rel IKO Imf 284 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 2 Load module file input specification Load module file input specification L Syntax L input file name Default assumption L assemble list file name Imf Function Option L specifies the input of a load module file Application When the primary name of a load module file is different from the primary name in the assemble list file or if its file type is not Imf specify option L Explanation dfafatal error occurs the absolute assemble list file cannot be output If only the primary name of the input file name is specified the list converter will assign the file type Imf and input the file Example of use Assemble list file name is kOmain prn and the load module file name is sample rel C gt Icnv78k0 kOmain prn Isample Imf User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 285 CHAPTER 9 LIST CONVERTER 3 Absolute assemble list file output specification Absolute assemble l
308. splay output 72 number of characters printed on 1 line 2046 If a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified an abort error occurs Ifthe number of characters is omitted 132 will be specified However when an assemble list file is output to display 80 will be specified The specified number of characters does not include the terminator CR LF If option NP is specified option LW is unavailable Notice control instruction with the same function as option LW can also be written at the beginning of a source module A A WIDTH For information on control instructions refer to RA78KO Assembler Package Language User s Manual 118 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Example of use Specify 80 as the number of characters per line in an assemble list file C gt ra78k0 c054 kOmain asm Iw80 This references the assemble list NAME SAMPM HEX ASCII Conversion Program PUBLIC MAIN START main routine EXTRN CONVAH DSEG DS DS CSEG DW CSEG AT OFE20H 1 2 AT OH START Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT MI SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Wi 5 5 6 6 7 7 Ar 8 8 e 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 DATA 15 15 FE20 HDTSA 16 16 FE21 STASC 17 17 18 18 CODE 19 19 0000 R0000 MAIN 20 20 21 21 22 22 0000 START 23 23 24 24 25 25 e e III I
309. structured assembler preprocessor option at startup for two or more structured assembly operations To start up the structured assembler from a parameter file specify the parameter file specification option F on the command line The procedure for starting up the structured assembler from a parameter file is shown below X path name st78k0 A source module file name A F parameter file name T T T a b d a Current drive name b Current directory name b c Parameter file specification option d d Parameter file name The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows User s Manual U17199EJ1V0UM 69 70 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR A option A option A A If the source module file name is omitted from the command line only one source module file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all options and output file names specified in the command line Example Creating a parameter file test1 pst using the editor lt Contents of test1 pst gt Parameterfile test1 s osample asm esample est c054 The parameter file test1 pst is used to start up the structured assembler preprocessor C gt st78k0 ftest1 pst User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 3 2 Execution start and
310. t ASCII Conversion Program sub routine input condition HL lt hex 2 code output condition BC register lt ASCII 2 code FRI III e IK III I He e e IK I I IK ITI I KI TOK IKI IKK I IKI KIA KICK PUBLIC CONVAH CSEG CONVAH XOR A A ROL4 HL hex upper code load CALL SASC MOV B A store result XOR A A ROL4 HL hex lower code load CALL SASC MOV store result RET FRI I IK IOI IK KI TOK IK IIE KI II KIT IK II IK IAA IK subroutine convert ASCII code input Acc lower 4bits lt hex code output Acc lt ASCII code SASC 0 check hex code gt 9 BC SASC1 ADD A 07H bias 7H SASC1 ADD A 30H bias 30H RET END User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 375 APPENDIX A SAMPLE PROGRAMS test1 s EXTRN SEARCH STABLE EXTRN _ STBEG PUBLIC MAIN START kk k k k k k k k k k k k kk k kok e He He e I IOI He He e He He e III I III I III RIK Searching data k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k kok e He He e I IOI He e He He e III SDATA DB 04 12H 34H 56H 78H CODE CSEG START DW MAIN MAIN MOVW SP STBEG DE STABLE HL SDATA CALL SEARCH if bit ICY SLI repeat until forever else SERR repeat until forever endif END 376 User s Manual U17199EJ1
311. t List File Name Output List Name Link list file Map list Public symbol list Local symbol list 10 3 1 Link list file headers The header is always output at the beginning of a link list file Output format kkk Link information 78K 0 Series Linker 1 Vx xx Date 2 xx xxx xxxx Page 3 1 Command 4 kOmain rel kOsub rel okO map Para file 5 Out file 6 KO MAP Map File 7 KOMAIN MAP Direc File 8 Directive 9 10 3 output segment s 11 37H byte s real data 12 23 symbol s defined Explanation of output items Table 10 10 Explanation of Link List File Header Output Items Item Details Linker version no Date of link list file creation Page no 4 or 5 digits Command line image 4 or 5 digits Contents of parameter file Output load module file name Link list file name Directive file name 304 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST Table 10 10 Explanation of Link List File Header Output Items Item Details 9 Directive file contents 4 or 5 digits 10 Number of segments output to load module file 4 or 5 digits 11 Size of data output to load module file 12 Number of symbols output to load module file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 305 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 3 2 Map list T
312. t Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers offic
313. t error is found on the command line processing ends when another command line error is found 2 Fatal error Exxxx An execution error has occurred When another error is found the program quits interrupts without generating an output object When a fatal error occurs to clarify that an output object is not generated if an object with the same name exists that object is deleted 3 Internal error Cxxxx Processing is immediately terminated aborted because an internal error has occurred 4 Warning Wxxxx An output object is generated which may not be the result the user intended Remark In a program executed in conversational format the execution ends normally unless an abort error occurs The error messages of the assembler package are classified as follows Fn0xx Command line analysis error Fn9xx File or system error Fnixx Other abort error Cnxxx Internal error n 1to6 En2xx Statement specification error 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor En3xx Expression error 2 Assembler En4xx Symbol error 3 Linker _En5xx Segment error 4 Object Converter En6xx Control instruction or macro error 5 Librarian Wnxxx Any type of warning 6 List Converter 322 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 2 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages Table 12 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Message
314. t file KOsub prn During assembly if the option E is specified the assembler outputs an error list file 5 Create a directive file A directive file is a file which indicates the location of segments for the linker Create a directive file when you need to expand the default ROM RAM area or define a new memory area You will also need to create a directive file when you wish to locate segments not defined as absolute segments within a source module file to a specific address in memory During linking use the D option to enter the directive file to the linker Example To extend the ROM area 0H to 7FFFH to OH to FA7FH and extend the RAM area to FE20H to FFFFH and RAM1 FBOOH to FE1FH Write the following to the directive file MEMORY ROM 0H OFA80H MEMORY RAM OFBOOH 320H MEMORY RAM OFE20H 1E0H Figure 3 5 Link Directive Default memory space gt lt Memory space after specification gt FFFFH FFFFH FBOOH RAMI FBOOH FA80H 8000H 0000H 0000H 6 As the result of the assembly the output object module files kOmain rel and kOsub rel are linked Enter k0 dr as the directive file Enter the following on the command line C gt Ik78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dk0 drN 1 oko Imf SNote 2 Notes 1 Not necessary if a directive file is not specified User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 63 CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 Notes 2 Stack resolution
315. t in library KOSLIB rel pum pee E Files of type Object module files rel lt Back Finish Cancel Help 8 7 2 Item settings The various items in the lt Subcommand gt dialog box are described below lt Library File Name gt Dialog Box Library file name Specify the name of the library file by using the Browse button or by directly inputting the file name Temporary directory t Specify the path where a temporary file is to be created by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path name Subcommand gt Dialog Box Look in Specify the path where the object module file to be used as a library exists by using the Browse button or directly inputting a path If a path is specified a file list is displayed Files of type Specify the type of the file to be displayed on the list of files Library file name This edit box is read only It displays the file name of the library currently specified Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 273 274 CHAPTER 8 LIBRARIAN Module list in library A list of the object module files in the library currently specified is displayed ADD gt Add a module to an existing library file PICK lt Retrieve the specified module from an existing library file REPLACE lt gt Replace an existing library file module with the module of another object module file DELETE Delete a module from an existing library file LIST Out
316. t object module file to be output from among Intel standard HEX format Intel extended HEX format Extended Tech format Motorola S type format standard address and Motorola S type format 32 bit address Explanation The address ranges specified by each of these options are as follows KI Intel standard HEX format OH to FFFFH up to 64 KB KIE Intel extended HEX format OH to FFFFFH up to 1 MB KT Extended Tech format OH to FFFFFFFFH up to 4 GB KM Motorola S type format standard address OH to FFFFFFH up to 16 MB KME Motorola S type format 32 bit address OH to FFFFFFFFH up to 4 GB Example of use Specify a Motorola S type format standard address object C gt 0c78k0 k0 Imf km User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 233 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 8 Device file search path specification Device file search path specification Y Syntax path name Default assumption Device files will be read from the path determined in the following order i Adev for the oc78k0 exe startup path ii Path by which OC78KO was started up iii Current directory iv The environmental variable PATH Function Reads a device file from the specified path Application Specify a path where a device file exists Explanation If anything other than a path name is specified after option Y an abort error occurs If the path name is omitt
317. ted to 500H in memory area ROM refer to Figure 6 2 1 MERGE SEG1 AT 500H When input segment SEG1 is allocated to memory area MEM refer to Figure 6 2 2 MERGE SEG1 MEM1 When input segment SEG is allocated to 1500H in memory area MEM1 refer to Figure 6 2 3 MERGE SEG AT 1500 1 Figure 6 2 Specific Examples of Segment Allocation FFFFH FFFFH FFFFH FEOOH 2000H 2000H 2000H 1500H 1000H 1000H 1000H 0500H 0500H 0000H 0000H 0000H User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 155 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 5 Linker Startup 6 5 1 Linker startup The following 2 methods can be used to start up the linker 1 156 Startup from the command line path name Ik78k0 A option object module file name option A d T T 1 8 b c d e d a Current drive name b Current directory name Linker command file name This contains detailed directions for the action of the linker If more than one linker option is specified separate the options with a space Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks e This contains detailed directions for the action of the linker A maximum of 1024 items can be input in an input module Specify the file name of a path that includes a space by enclosing it in a pair of double quotation marks Example C gt lk78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 Imf g Startup from a parameter
318. ted to ASCII code The program consists of two modules a main routine and a subroutine The name of the main routine module is SAMPM and it is stored in kKOmain asm The name of the subroutine module is SAMPS and it is stored in KOsub asm Figure 3 1 Structure of Sample Program kOmain asm Main routine gt NAME SAMPM kOsub asm lt Subroutine gt NAME SAMPS END 46 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 kOomain asm Main routine NAME SAMPM FRI IR III IR IOI IR e He He I IOI I He e He IIT ICI I ITI KIT II IAI KIA IK HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program E main routine gt k k II k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ITI k K IOI He e e II I I He e e He He e IIT II KI kk kk k k ke PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH EXTRN _ STBEG DATA DSEG saddr HDTSA DS 1 STASC DS 2 CODE CSEG ATOH MAIN DW START CSEG START chip initialize MOVW SP STBEG MOV HDTSA 1AH MOVW HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL register CALL CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code MOVW DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table MOV A B MOV DE A INCW DE MOV A C MOV DE A BR END User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 47 CHAPTER 3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 kOsub asm Subroutine NAME SAMPS k K ehe e e he ehe e KK KEKE KKK KKK KKK k k
319. tenv INC78KO ra78k0 setenv LIB78KO0 ra78k0 setenv LANG78K EUC 44 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION lt Example when sh is used gt PATH PATH ra78k0 1 78 ra78k0 LIB78KO ra78k0 LANG78K EUC export PATH INC78K0 LIB78K0 LANG78K 2 6 3 Kanji code in source file Kanji 2 byte characters can be used in specific places comments etc in the source file Specify the kanji code type using an environmental variable LANG78K kanji code control instruction KANJICODE or kanji code specification option ZE ZS ZN User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 45 CHAPTER3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 This chapter explains the procedures for using the assembler package RA78K0 from assembling to object conversion Sample programs kOmain asm and kOsub asm are assembled linked and converted into objects in accordance with the execution procedures explained In this section how to run the assembler package on command line is explained 3 1 Before Executing RA78K0 3 1 4 Sample programs Among the files stored on the system disk are kOmain asm and kOsub asm These files are a sample program for use in verifying the operation of the assembler package In later assembler operation these files will be input to the assembler as source program files kOmain asm Main module kOsub asm Sub module These programs consist of hexadecimal data conver
320. than a path name has been specified in the option that specifies the path for the parameter Action by user Specify a correct path name F1012 Message Missing parameter option Cause A necessary parameter has not been specified Action by user Specify the parameter User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 323 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 1 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages 55 F1013 Message Parameter not needed option Cause An unnecessary parameter has been specified Action by user Delete the unnecessary parameter F1014 Message Out of range option Cause The specified numerical value is outside the range Action by user Specify a correct numerical value F1015 Message Parameter is too long option Cause The number of characters in the parameter exceeds the limit Action by user Specify a parameter whose character number is within the limit F1016 Message Illegal parameter option Cause The syntax of the parameter is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct parameter F1017 Message Too many parameters option Cause The total number of parameters exceeds the limit Action by user Specify parameters within the number limit F1018 Message Option is not recognized option Cause The option name is incorrect Action by user Specify a correct option name F1019
321. tive file is to 1 Declare addresses in the installed memory 2 Divide memory into two or more areas Example CALLT area Internal ROM External ROM SADDR Internal RAM other than SADDR 3 Segment allocation is specified by the linker The following items are specified for each segment Absolute address Specification of memory address only Use an editor to create a directive file a file which specifies directives When the linker is started up specify option D to read the created file The linker reads the directives from the file and interprets them to perform linking Two types of directives can be used as follows Table 6 3 Types of Directives Directive Type Explanation Memory directive Declares an address in installed memory Divides memory into two or more areas and specifies a memory area Segment location directive Specifies location of a segment 6 4 1 Directive files The formats for specifying directives in a directive file are as follows A number of directives can be specified in a single directive file Memory directives MEMORY memory area name start address value size memory space name Segment allocation directives MERGE segment name AT Astart address memory area name specification memory space name 1 Reserved words The following words are reserved words in a directive file Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 149 150 CHAPTER 6 LINKER
322. tput E3424 Message ZF REL and no ZF REL are mixed in file file name Cause When linking load module of the boot area ROM program of a flash ROM model with object module of the flash area program some object module do not specify the ZF option during compilation E3425 Message There are different function ID in same name function name file name Cause A function of the same name declared as EXT_FUNC by the compiler has a different ID value E3426 Message Multiple input BOOT file file name Cause Two or more load module of the boot area ROM program are input when load module of the boot area ROM program of a flash ROM model is linked with object module of the flash area program E3427 Message BOOT REL and ZF REL are mixed in file name Cause Object module specified by the ZF option is input during compilation for linking with the ZF option specified E3428 Message FLASH start address larger than ROM max address Cause The first address of the flash ROM area is greater than the ROM end address of the target device E3429 Message BOOT segment segment name are found in FLASH file file name Cause When load module of the boot area ROM program of a flash ROM model is linked with object module of the flash area ROM program a segment with a location address less than the first address of the flash ROM area exists in the object module E3430 Message Different FLASH address in file name Cause All the
323. tring as constant Cause Limit on string constant length 4 characters is exceeded E2306 Message Illegal number Cause Incorrect numerical value is specified E2307 Message Division by zero Cause A value is divided by zero E2308 Message Too large integer Cause The value of a constant exceeds 16 bits E2309 Message Illegal bit value Cause Incorrect bit value is specified E2310 Message Bit value out of range Cause Bit value exceeds the range 0 to 7 E2311 Message Operand out of range n Cause Specified value exceeds the range n 0 to 7 E2312 Message Operand out of range byte Cause Value of an operand exceeds the range 00H to FFH or the value of the byte in an operand is outside the range 128 to 127 E2313 Message Operand out of range addr5 Cause Operand is outside the specifiable range 40H to 7EH for addr5 332 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages 55 2314 Message Operand out of range addr11 Cause Operand is outside the specifiable range 800H to FFFH for addr11 E2315 Message Operand out of range saddr Cause Operand is outside the specifiable range OFE20H to OFF1FH for E2316 Message Operand out of range addr16 Cause Operand is outside the specifiable range varies according to target device for addr16 E2317 Message Even
324. tronics Corporation xxxx xxxx 78 error F1006 File not found SAMPLE S Program aborted In the above example the specification of a non existent source module file results in an error and assembly is stopped Example 2 When a non existent option is specified C gt st78k0 test1 s z Structured assembler preprocessor for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx RA78KO error F1012 Missing parameter z Please enter ST78KO if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example the specification of a non existent option results in an error and assembly is stopped When an error message is displayed and assembly is stopped search for the cause of the error in CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES and take action accordingly User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 4 4 Structured Assembler Options 4 4 4 Types of structured assembler options The structured assembler preprocessor options give detailed instructions for the operation of the structured assembler preprocessor The structured assembler preprocessor options are classified into the following 13 types Table 4 2 Structured Assembler Options Classification Option Description Device type specification C Specifies the type of the target device Word symbol character SC Specifies t
325. tructions to be freely adjusted thus improving the program s readability Numerical value 1 specifies the number of tabs until the instruction is output Numerical value 2 specifies the number of tabs until the instruction operand is output Numerical value 3 specifies the number of tabs until the instruction command is output Specify the numerical value as a decimal number from within the following ranges Numerical value 1 0 to 97 Numerical value 2 1 to 98 Numerical value 3 2 to 99 Numerical value 1 numerical value 2 numerical value 3 f more than one specification is made the item specified last is valid Example of use 9 is specified for numerical value 1 4 for numerical value 2 and 5 for numerical value 3 C gt st78k0 test s wt3 4 5 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 77 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURED ASSEMBLER PREPROCESSOR 5 Include file read path specification Include file read path specification 1 Syntax path name path name Two or more path names may be specified Default assumption The include file is searched in the following sequence i 1 Path where the source file exists ii 2 Path specified by an environmental variable INC78KO Function Specifies the path name of the include file that is input to the structured assembler Explanation Two or more path names can be specified at one time with each delimited by a comma A spa
326. uage to input the source program for the assembler For more information on the structured assembler preprocessor and structured assembly language refer to the separate RA78KO Structured Assembly Language User s Manual Figure 1 10 Function of Structured Assembler Preprocessor Structured Device fije Note assembler source file Input Input Structured assembler preprocessor Output Note Obtain the device file by downloading it from the Online Delivery Service ODS which can be accessed from the following Website http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html 26 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 3 Assembler The assembler is a program which inputs the source module file and converts the assembly language into a collection of binary instructions machine language If the assembler discovers errors in the descriptions in the source module it outputs an assembly error If no assembly errors are found the assembler outputs an object module file which specifies location data such as where in memory the machine language data and each machine language should be stored The assembly data is output as an assemble list file Figure 1 11 Function of Assembler Source module file Device file Note Input Input Assembly language is converted into machine language YES Assembly errors Assembler Object module file Object module file Output is created List fil
327. uction in CSEG User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 351 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 4 Object Converter Error Messages 352 tas a Error Message F4900 Message Can t open file file name Cause File cannot be opened F4901 Message Can t close file file name Cause File cannot be closed F4902 Message Can t read file file name Cause File cannot be correctly read F4903 Message Can t access file file name Cause File cannot be correctly read or written to F4904 Message Can t write file file name Cause Data cannot be correctly written to an output file F4905 Message Can t open overlay file file name Cause The overlay file cannot be opened Action byuser Check if the overlay file is in the same directory as the execution format C4999 Message Object Converter internal error Cause This is an internal error Action by user Contact NEC Electronics or an NEC Electronics distributor User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES 12 6 Librarian Error Messages Table 12 5 Librarian Error Messages Error Message F5001 Message Missing input file Cause Only options are specified No input files are specified F5002 Message Too many input files Cause Total number of input files exceeds the limit F5003 Message Unrecognized string Cause
328. ule file Source module file Assembler Assembler Object module file Object module file Assemble list file Assemble list file Load module file Object converter Symbol table file HEX format object module file 54 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO Figure 3 3 RA78K0 Execution Procedure 2 Source module file Source module file Assembler Assembler Object module file Object module file Library file Load module file Link list file List converter List converter Object converter Absolute assemble list file Absolute assemble list file Symbol table file object module file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Assemble list file 55 CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 3 3 Execution Procedure of ST78K0 To verify the operation of the 5 78 use the batch file st bat stored on the system disk The structured assembler preprocessor assembler linker object converter and list converter are executed in order using the sample programs test1 s and test2 s which are written in structured assembly language st bat as source files The batch file then terminates following output of any error messages Specification of the type of the target device can be input to this batch file the device file is sold separately The following explanation uses the uPD780058 as the target device 56 User s Manual U17199EJ1
329. ule file is output Application Specify the option O to change the output destination and output file name of the HEX format object module file Specify option NO when performing an object conversion only to output a symbol table file This will shorten object conversion time Explanation Specify a disk type file name for the output file name If a device type file name is specified an abort error will result If the output file name is omitted when option O is specified the HEX format object module file input file name hex will be output to the current directory If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name hex will be output to the specified path df both options O and NO are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence When ZF option is specified the file type is as follows Table 7 16 File Type When ZF Option Is Specified File File Type Output file at boot area ROM program side hxb Output file at program side other than boot area ROM hxf When a code is output to a segment located in extended space the object converter generates a separate HEX format object module file for each space The file types of HEX format object module files generated for extended space are as follows Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 223 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Table 7 17 Type of HEX Format Object Module File for Extended Spac
330. unction Relation to Other Options When Omitted Device type C device Specifies the device Independent Cannot be specification type type of the target omitted device Object O file name Specifies the output If both options O and NO O input file module file of an object module are specified at the same name rel output file time the option specified specification last takes precedence P NO Specifies that no P object module file is output Forced J Specifies that the If both options J and NJ NJ object object module file are specified at the same module file can be output even if time the option specified output a fatal error occurs last takes precedence specification NJ Makes option J unavailable Debug data G Specifies that local If both options G and NG G output symbol data is to be are specified at the same specification added to an object time the option specified module file last takes precedence NG Makes option G unavailable GA Specifies that source If both options GA and GA debugging data is to NGA are specified at the be added to an object same time the option module file by the specified last takes structured assembler precedence NGA Makes option GA unavailable Include file path name Specifies input of an Independent Path where the read path path name include file from a source file specification two or specified path exists more path Path specified names can by t
331. uppercase or lowercase characters It cannot be specified in a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters The start address specifies a numerical constant Segment is located in the Start address specified start address Segment Cautions 1 When a segment is located in the specified start address if it exceeds the memory area range for the memory area in which it is located an error will result Cautions 2 link directive cannot be used to specify a start address for a segment whose location address is specified by the AT instruction of a segment directive or by an ORG directive 3 Memory space names A memory space name specifies the memory area to which a segment is allocated of the following 16 names can be specified as a memory area name REGULAR EX1 EX2 EX3 EX4 EX5 EX6 EX7 EX8 EX9 EX10 EX11 EX12 EX13 EX14 EX15 Memory space names must be specified entirely in uppercase characters When a memory space name is omitted REGULAR is assumed to be specified Segment location destinations are determined as follows User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 153 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Table 6 4 Segment Location According to Combination of Memory Area Name Specification and Memory Space Name Memory Area Name Memory Space Name Segment Location Destination No specification No specification Default memory area in the REGULAR space No specification Memory space name A selected me
332. ured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages fun Error Message C1112 Message Structured assembler preprocessor internal error Cause An error has occurred inside the structured assembler preprocessor Action by user Contact NEC Electronics or an NEC Electronics distributor E1201 Message Illegal ELSE HENDIF Cause ELSE and ENDIF statements have been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the ELSE and ENDIF statements in the correct place E1202 Message Illegal Cause An ENDCALLT statement has been written in an incorrect place Action by user Write the ZENDCALLT statement in the correct place E1203 Message Missing ENDIF Cause The 4ENDIF statement is missing Action by user Write the ENDIF statement in the correct place E1204 Message Missing ENDCALLT Cause The ENDCALLT statement is missing Action by user Write the ZENDCALLT statement in the correct place E1205 Message Too many DEFCALLT definition Cause The registered number of callt instruction conversion patterns exceeds the limit Action by user Reduce the number of registered defcallt instructions E1206 Message Too many CALL instruction Cause There are too many instructions to be defined by ZDEFCALLT to ENDCALLT Action by user Specify only one instruction to be defined by 4DEFCALLT to ENDCALLT E1207 Message Duplicate definitio
333. ut format 78 1 error 2 E3405 3 Undefined symbol CONVAH in file KOMAIN REL Explanation of output items Table 10 14 Explanation of Error List Output Items when the linker is started up Item Details 1 Type of error 2 Error no 3 Error message 310 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 4 List Output by Object Converter The object converter outputs the following list Table 10 15 Explanation of Object Converter Output Items Output List File Name Output List Name Error list file Error list 10 4 1 Error list Error messages output when the object converter is started up are stored in an error list Output format Same as error list output by the linker User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 311 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 5 List Output by Librarian The librarian outputs the following list Table 10 16 List Output by Librarian Output List File Name Output List Name List file Library data output list 10 5 1 Library data output list The library data output list outputs data on the modules in a library file Output format 78K 0 Series librarian 1 Vx xx DATE 2 PAGE 3 1 LIB FILE NAME 4 KO LIB 5 XX 6 0001 7 KOMAIN REL 8 XX 9 MAIN 9 START NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 10 2 6 0002 7 KOSUB REL 8
334. utes value game 4 blank spaces Module name 2 Repeated in units of object modules Symbol table end mark Notes 1 Symbol attributes are the values shown in Table 7 14 Notes 2 For symbol values refer to Figure 7 5 216 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM Public symbols Local symbols for each module CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Table 7 14 Values of Symbol Attributes Value Symbol Attribute 00 Constant defined by the EQU directive 01 Label within a code segment 02 Label within a data segment 03 Bit symbol for ABBIT attribute 04 Bit symbol for AWBIT attribute 05 Bit symbol for saddr bit osaddr bit3 06 Bit symbol for wsadar bit4 07 Bit symbol for sfr bit bsfr bit3 08 Bit symbol for wsfr bit4 09 Bit symbol for RBBIT attribute 10 Bit symbol for RWBIT attribute 11 Bit symbol for byte register bit FF Module name Figure 7 5 Symbol Value Formats When the symbol attribute is NUMBER Constant value 4 digits When the symbol attribute is LABEL Address value 4 digits When the symbol attribute is a bit symbol Upper 13 bits Lower 3 bits Upper 13 bits Lower 3 bits The relative address from Bit position 0 to 7 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 217 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER 7 3 Object Converter Startup 7 3 1 Object converter startup The following two methods can be used to start up the object convert
335. utput List Output Items 312 Lists Output by List Converter 313 Structured Assembler Preprocessor Error Messages 323 Assembler Error Messages 329 Linker Error Messages 340 Object Converter Error Messages 349 Librarian Error Messages 353 List Converter Error Messages 357 Error Messages Displayed by the Structured Assembler Preprocessor ST78KO0 361 Error Messages Displayed by the Assembler RA78KO 364 Error Messages Displayed by the Linker LK78K0 367 Error Messages Displayed by the Object Converter OC78K0 370 Error Messages Displayed by the Librarian 1 78 0 371 Error Messages Displayed by the List Converter LENV78KO DLL 372 Example of output in Intel extended HEX format flash memory real address 383 Example of output in Intel extended HEX format bank number CPU address 384 Structured Assembler Options 385 Assembler Options 387 List of Linker Options 390 List of Object Converter Options 393 List of Librarian Options 395 List of List Converter Options 396 List of Subcommands 397 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER1 GENERAL This chapter describes the role of the RA78KO in microcontroller software development and the features of the RA78K0 1 1 Assembler Overview The RA78K0 Assembler Package hereafter referred to as the RA78KO is a generic term for a series of programs designed to translate
336. warning s found Clear the screen 78K 0 Series Object Converter Vx xx xxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Target chip uPD780058 Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Complete Oerror s and O0 warning s found User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 Clear the screen List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 start Pass start Conversion complete List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 start Pass2 start Conversion complete Clear the screen No error 2 Check the contents of drive C The following files are output kOmain rel Object module file kOmain prn Assemble list file kOsub rel Object module file kOsub prm Assemble list file rasample lmf Load module file rasample map Link list file rasample hex format object module file rasample sym Symbol table file kOmain p Absolute assemble list file kOsu p Absolute assemble list file User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78KO 3 Summary of RA78KO execution procedure The following is a brief summary of the execution procedure of RA78KO Figure 3 2 78 Execution Procedure 1 Source mod
337. which begins with other than L is described in the asm of the C source E2201 Message Syntax error Cause An incorrect statement format was used E2202 Message Illegal operand Cause The specified operand is illegal E2203 Message Illegal register Cause A register that cannot be specified was specified E2204 Message Illegal character Cause An illegal character is specified in the source module E2205 Message Unexpected LF in string Cause A carriage return code appears in a character string before the string is closed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 331 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages ta m Error Message E2206 Message Unexpected EOF in string Cause An end of file code appears in a character string before the string is closed E2207 Message Unexpected null code in string Cause A null code 00H is written in a character string E2209 Message Too many line number Cause The number of lines described in one file has exceeded the limit E2301 Message Too complex expression Cause Expression is too complex E2302 Message Absolute expression expected Cause A relocatable expression is specified E2303 Message Illegal expression Cause Incorrect format for expression is used E2304 Message Illegal symbol in expression file name Cause An unusable symbol is used in an expression E2305 Message Too long s
338. with the newest version E3415 Message QD QF etc and Not QD QF etc REL are mixed Cause An input object module file has a different specification for a compiler optimization option which must be the same for the entire program Compile using the same value as in the rest of the program User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 345 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 3 Linker Error Messages Error Number Error Message W3416 Message Multiple CAP NOCAP are in file file name option Defined first one in file file name option Cause CAP NOCAP assemble or compile options are not identical for all input object module files W3417 Message The version of tool name in file file name are more than one Used the first one in file file name Cause A discrepancy exists between each tool CC78K0 ST78K0 RA78K0 used until the link stage for all input object module files and the device file version W3418 Message File file name is old Can t find TOOL information Cause This is output when TOOL information is not found in input object module file Normally this is always output when link is performed with an old DF incompatible object module file W3420 Message File file name has already had error s warning s by name Cause An error message or warning message for each tool 78 5 78 RA78K0 used until the link stage is ou
339. x 302 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 2 5 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the assembler is started up Output format Pass1 Start 1 ERROR ASM 2 26 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2202 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 32 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2202 5 Illegal operand Pass Start 1 ERROR ASM 2 26 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2202 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 29 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2407 5 Undefined symbol reference DTSA 1 ERROR ASM 2 29 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2303 5 Illegal expression 1 ERROR ASM 2 32 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2202 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 37 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2407 5 Undefined symbol reference F 1 ERROR ASM 2 37 RA78KO 3 error 4 E2303 5 Illegal expression Explanation of output items Table 10 8 Explanation of Error List Output Items when the assembler is started up Item Details 1 Name of source module file in which error occurred 2 Line on which error occurred 3 Type of error 4 Error no 5 Error message Caution The file name and the line where the error occurred may not be displayed User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 303 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM OUTPUT LIST 10 3 Lists Output by Linker The linker outputs the following lists Table 10 9 Lists Output by Linker Outpu
340. x 32 digits The object code is shown one byte at a time with the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits separated A maximum of 16 bytes can be expressed in the code Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the code Start address code 04 000 03 0000 0000 F9 T T T T T T i ii iii iv v vi i Record mark ii Fixed to 04 iii Fixed to 0000 iv Fixed to 03 v Fixed to 0000 vi Fixed to 0000 vii Fixed to F9 4 End record 1 00 0000 01 FF f T T i ii iii iv i Record mark ii Fixed to 00 iii Fixed to 0000 iv Fixed to 01 v Fixed to FF Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 207 CHAPTER 7 OBJECT CONVERTER Extended tech HEX format object module file format HEX files are composed of the following 3 types of block i Data block ii Symbol block This is an unused block Symbol data uses the symbol table file iii Termination block Each block starts with a header field composed of a common 6 characters and ends with the string end ofline Maximum length of each block is 255 not including the start character and end of line The format for the common header field is shown in Table 7 4 Table 7 4 Extended Tech Header Field Item Noor ASCII Explanation Characters P 1 The percent symbol specifies that the block is
341. xxxx create kO lib Contents of kO job add kO lib kOsub rel Contents of kO job exit 64 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF 78 11 Check the contents of drive C The librarian outputs the library file k0 lib 12 Create an absolute assemble list as follows To create the absolute assemble list KOmain asm input kOmain rel KOmain asm and kO Imf to the list converter Enter the following on the command line C gt Icnv78k0 kOmain IKO Imf The following message is output on the display List Conversion Program for RA78K 0 Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation xxxx xxxx Pass1 start Pass2 start Conversion complete 13 Check the contents of drive C The list converter outputs the absolute assemble list file KOmain p User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 65 CHAPTER 3 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF RA78K0 3 5 Using Parameter File If two or more options are input when the assembler or linker is started the information necessary for starting cannot be completely specified on the command line or the same specification may be repeatedly made In this case the parameter file is used To use the parameter file specify the parameter file specification option on command line Assembler or linker is started by the parameter file as follows gt path name ra78k0 A F parameter file name gt path name IK
342. y ID ai ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF H Browse Command Line Options Apply Cancel 194 Users Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER Figure 6 4 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Output2 gt gt Tab Is Selected Linker Options Xl Output 2 Library Others Dutput File Name Z Browse Output Map List km Output Directive File Image kd Output Public Symbol List kp Output Local Symbol List kl Form Feed at End of List File lf Lines per Pagef Il 66 Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help Figure 6 5 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Library gt gt Tab Is Selected Linker Options E Output1 Output2 Library Others Library File b Edit Library File Search Path i 397 Ed Command Line Options Cancel Apply Help User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 195 196 CHAPTER 6 LINKER Figure 6 6 lt Linker Options gt Dialog Box When lt lt Others gt gt Tab Is Selected Linker Options User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 7 2 Option settings The various options in the lt Linker Options gt dialog box are described below lt lt Output gt gt Tab Load Module File o Output File Name Specify the path and file name of the load module file by using the Browse button o
343. y area can be defined with 1 memory directive A memory directive can be specified more than once However multiple definitions in the specified order will result in an error The default memory area is effective as long as the same memory area is not redefined in a memory directive If the specification of a memory directive is omitted only the default memory area carried by the linker for each device will be specified If you wish to use a different memory area without using the default memory space specify the size of the default area name as O Example of Use 152 Define the addresses OH to 1FFH in the memory space EX1 as ROMA MEMORY ROMA 0H 200H EX1 User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 4 58 Segment location directives A segment location directive is a directive which locates a specified segment in a specified area of memory or a specific address Syntax MERGE A segment name A A AT A A start address A A A memory area name A A memory space name 1 Segment name The segment name is the name of a segment included in an object module file input to the linker Only an input segment can be specified with a segment name The segment name must be specified in the same way as in the source 2 Start address The start address allocates a segment to the area specified by start address The reserved word AT must be specified entirely in either
344. ymbol or refers to a bit symbol in an expression E2407 Message Undefined symbol reference symbol name Cause An undefined symbol is used User s Manual U17199EJ1VOUM 333 CHAPTER 12 ERROR MESSAGES Table 12 2 Assembler Error Messages fa Error Message E2408 Message Multiple symbol definition symbol name Cause Symbol name is defined more than once E2409 Message Too many symbols in operand Cause The number of symbols written in an operand exceeds the number that can be described in 1 line E2410 Message Phase error Cause The value of the symbol changed during assemble for example an EQU symbol label changed by optimum processing of BR directive is defined in an operand E2411 Message This symbol is reserved symbol name Cause The defined symbol is a reserved word E2502 Message Illegal segment name Cause Symbol is written with an illegal segment name E2503 Message Different segment type segment name Cause Two or more segments are defined with the same name but types are different E2504 Message Too many segment Cause Number of segments defined exceeds limit 256 E2505 Message Current segment is not exist Cause An ENDS directive was written before a segment was created or before a subsequent segment was created after the previous segment had ended E2506 Message Can t describe DB DW DS ORG label in BSEG Cause DB

RA78K0 Ver.3.80 Assembler Package Operation UM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents